<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smb.conf</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smb.conf"><a name="smb.conf.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smb.conf &#8212; The configuration file for the Samba suite</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SYNOPSIS"><a name="id298153"></a><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><p>
	The <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file is a configuration  file for the Samba suite. <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> contains  runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The
	 <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file is designed to be configured and administered by the
	 <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a> program. The
	complete description of the file format and possible parameters held within are here for reference purposes.
	</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="FILE FORMAT"><a name="FILEFORMATSECT"></a><h2>FILE FORMAT</h2><p>
	The file consists of sections and parameters. A section begins with the name of the section in square brackets
	and continues until the next section begins. Sections contain parameters of the form:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> = <em class="replaceable"><code>value </code></em>
</pre><p>
	</p><p>
	The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated line represents either a comment, a section name or
	a parameter.
	</p><p>Section and parameter names are not case sensitive.</p><p>
	Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant.  Whitespace before or after the first equals sign is
	discarded.  Leading, trailing and internal whitespace in section and parameter names is irrelevant. Leading
	and trailing whitespace in a parameter value is discarded. Internal whitespace within a parameter value is
	retained verbatim.
	</p><p>
	Any line beginning with a semicolon (<span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">;</span>&#8221;</span>) or a hash (<span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">#</span>&#8221;</span>) 
	character is ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace.
	</p><p>
	Any line ending in a <span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote"><code class="literal">\</code></span>&#8221;</span> is continued on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion.
	</p><p>
	The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean,
	which may be given as yes/no, 1/0 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean values, but is preserved
	in string values. Some items such as create masks are numeric.
	</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SECTION DESCRIPTIONS"><a name="id266887"></a><h2>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</h2><p>
	Each section in the configuration file (except for the [global] section) describes a shared resource (known as
	a <span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">share</span>&#8221;</span>). The section name is the name of the shared resource and the parameters within the
	section define the shares attributes.
	</p><p>
	There are three special sections, [global], [homes] and [printers], which are described under
	 <span class="emphasis"><em>special sections</em></span>. The following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions.
	</p><p>
	A share consists of a directory to which access is being given plus a description of the access rights
	which are granted to the user of the service. Some housekeeping options are also specifiable.
	</p><p>
	Sections are either file share services (used by the client as an extension of their native file systems)
	or printable services (used by the client to access print services on the host running the server).
	</p><p>
	Sections may be designated <span class="emphasis"><em>guest</em></span> services, in which case no password is required to
	access them. A specified UNIX <span class="emphasis"><em>guest account</em></span> is used to define access privileges in this
	case.
	</p><p>
	Sections other than guest services will require a password to access them. The client provides the
	username. As older clients only provide passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list of usernames to
	check against the password using the <code class="literal">user =</code> option in the share definition. For modern clients
	such as Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000, this should not be necessary.
	</p><p>
	The access rights granted by the server are masked by the access rights granted to the specified or guest
	UNIX user by the host system. The server does not grant more access than the host system grants.
	</p><p>
	The following sample section defines a file space share.  The user has write access to the path <code class="filename">/home/bar</code>.  The share is accessed via the share name <code class="literal">foo</code>:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
	<em class="parameter"><code>[foo]</code></em>
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /home/bar</a>
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only = no</a>
</pre><p>
	</p><p>
	The following sample section defines a printable share.  The share is read-only, but printable. That is,
	the only write access permitted is via calls to open, write to and close a spool file. The <span class="emphasis"><em>guest
	ok</em></span> parameter means access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified elsewhere):
</p><pre class="programlisting">
	<em class="parameter"><code>[aprinter]</code></em>
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /usr/spool/public</a>
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only = yes</a>
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE" target="_top">printable = yes</a>
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok = yes</a>
</pre><p>
	</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SPECIAL SECTIONS"><a name="id265955"></a><h2>SPECIAL SECTIONS</h2><div class="refsect2" title="The [global] section"><a name="id265960"></a><h3>The [global] section</h3><p>
		Parameters in this section apply to the server as a whole, or are defaults for sections that do not
		specifically define certain items. See the notes under PARAMETERS for more information.
		</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="The [homes] section"><a name="HOMESECT"></a><h3>The [homes] section</h3><p>
		If a section called [homes] is included in the configuration file, services connecting clients
		to their home directories can be created on the fly by the server.
		</p><p>
		When the connection request is made, the existing sections are scanned. If a match is found, it is
		used. If no match is found, the requested section name is treated as a username and looked up in the local
		password file. If the name exists and the correct password has been given, a share is created by cloning the
		[homes] section.
		</p><p>
		Some modifications are then made to the newly created share:
		</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>
			The share name is changed from homes to the located username.
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
			If no path was given, the path is set to the user's home directory.
			</p></li></ul></div><p>
		If you decide to use a <span class="emphasis"><em>path =</em></span> line in your [homes] section, it may be useful 
		to use the %S macro. For example:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<strong class="userinput"><code>path = /data/pchome/%S</code></strong>
</pre><p>
		is useful if you have different home directories for your PCs than for UNIX access.
		</p><p>
		This is a fast and simple way to give a large number of clients access to their home directories with a minimum 
		of fuss.
		</p><p>
		A similar process occurs if the requested section name is <span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">homes</span>&#8221;</span>, except that the share
		name is not changed to that of the requesting user. This method of using the [homes] section works well if
		different users share a client PC.
		</p><p>
		The [homes] section can specify all the parameters a normal service section can specify, though some make more sense 
		than others. The following is a typical and suitable [homes] section:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<em class="parameter"><code>[homes]</code></em>
<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only = no</a>
</pre><p>
		</p><p>
		An important point is that if guest access is specified in the [homes] section, all home directories will be 
		visible to all clients <span class="emphasis"><em>without a password</em></span>.  In the very unlikely event that this is actually
		desirable, it is wise to also specify <span class="emphasis"><em>read only access</em></span>.
		</p><p>
		The <span class="emphasis"><em>browseable</em></span> flag for auto home directories will be inherited from the global browseable 
		flag, not the [homes] browseable flag. This is useful as it means setting <span class="emphasis"><em>browseable = no</em></span> in
		the [homes] section will hide the [homes] share but make any auto home directories visible.
		</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="The [printers] section"><a name="PRINTERSSECT"></a><h3>The [printers] section</h3><p>
		This section works like [homes], but for printers.
		</p><p>
		If a [printers] section occurs in the configuration file, users are able to connect to any printer 
		specified in the local host's printcap file.
		</p><p>
		When a connection request is made, the existing sections are scanned. If a match is found, it is used.
		If no match is found, but a [homes] section exists, it is used as described above. Otherwise, the requested
		section name is treated as a printer name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to see if the requested
		section name is a valid printer share name. If a match is found, a new printer share is created by cloning the
		[printers] section.
		</p><p>
		A few modifications are then made to the newly created share:
		</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>The share name is set to the located printer name</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>If no printer name was given, the printer name is set to the located printer name</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>If the share does not permit guest access and no username was given, the username is set
				to the located printer name.</p></li></ul></div><p>
		The [printers] service MUST be printable - if you specify otherwise, the server will refuse 
		to load the configuration file.
		</p><p>
		Typically the path specified is that of a world-writeable spool directory with the sticky bit set on 
		it. A typical [printers] entry looks like this:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<em class="parameter"><code>[printers]</code></em>
<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /usr/spool/public</a>
<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok = yes</a>
<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE" target="_top">printable = yes</a>
</pre><p>
		</p><p>
		All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned. 
		If your printing subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have to set up a pseudo-printcap. This is a file
		consisting of one or more lines like this:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
alias|alias|alias|alias...    
</pre><p>
		</p><p>
		Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for your printing subsystem. In the [global] section,
		specify the new file as your printcap.  The server will only recognize names found in your pseudo-printcap,
		which of course can contain whatever aliases you like. The same technique could be used simply to limit access
		to a subset of your local printers.
		</p><p>
		An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the first entry of a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines,
		components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols (<code class="literal">|</code>).
		</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>
		On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are defined on the system you may be able to use
		<code class="literal">printcap name = lpstat</code> to automatically obtain a list of printers. See the
		<code class="literal">printcap name</code> option for more details.
		</p></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="USERSHARES"><a name="id307272"></a><h2>USERSHARES</h2><p>Starting with Samba version 3.0.23 the capability for non-root users to add, modify, and delete
	their own share definitions has been added. This capability is called <span class="emphasis"><em>usershares</em></span> and
	is controlled by a set of parameters in the [global] section of the smb.conf.
	The relevant parameters are :
	</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">usershare allow guests</span></dt><dd><p>Controls if usershares can permit guest access.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">usershare max shares</span></dt><dd><p>Maximum number of user defined shares allowed.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">usershare owner only</span></dt><dd><p>If set only directories owned by the sharing user can be shared.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">usershare path</span></dt><dd><p>Points to the directory containing the user defined share definitions.
		The filesystem permissions on this directory control who can create user defined shares.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">usershare prefix allow list</span></dt><dd><p>Comma-separated list of absolute pathnames restricting what directories
		can be shared. Only directories below the pathnames in this list are permitted.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">usershare prefix deny list</span></dt><dd><p>Comma-separated list of absolute pathnames restricting what directories
		can be shared. Directories below the pathnames in this list are prohibited.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">usershare template share</span></dt><dd><p>Names a pre-existing share used as a template for creating new usershares.
		All other share parameters not specified in the user defined share definition
		are copied from this named share.</p></dd></dl></div><p>To allow members of the UNIX group <code class="literal">foo</code> to create user defined
	shares, create the directory to contain the share definitions as follows:
	</p><p>Become root:</p><pre class="programlisting">
mkdir /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
chgrp foo /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
</pre><p>Then add the parameters 

</p><pre class="programlisting">
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERSHAREPATH" target="_top">usershare path = /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares</a>
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERSHAREMAXSHARES" target="_top">usershare max shares = 10</a> # (or the desired number of shares)
</pre><p> 

	to the global
	section of your <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. Members of the group foo may then manipulate the user defined shares
	using the following commands.</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]]</span></dt><dd><p>To create or modify (overwrite) a user defined share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare delete sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To delete a user defined share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare list wildcard-sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To list user defined shares.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare info wildcard-sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To print information about user defined shares.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="PARAMETERS"><a name="id307465"></a><h2>PARAMETERS</h2><p>Parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</p><p>
	Some parameters are specific to the [global] section (e.g., <span class="emphasis"><em>security</em></span>).  Some parameters
	are usable in all sections (e.g., <span class="emphasis"><em>create mask</em></span>). All others are permissible only in normal
	sections. For the purposes of the following descriptions the [homes] and [printers] sections will be
	considered normal.  The letter <span class="emphasis"><em>G</em></span> in parentheses indicates that a parameter is specific to
	the [global] section. The letter <span class="emphasis"><em>S</em></span> indicates that a parameter can be specified in a
	service specific section. All <span class="emphasis"><em>S</em></span> parameters can also be specified in the [global] section
	- in which case they will define the default behavior for all services.
	</p><p>
	Parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may not create best bedfellows, but at least you can
	find them! Where there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer to the preferred
	synonym.
	</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS"><a name="id307504"></a><h2>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</h2><p>
	Many of the strings that are settable in the config file can take substitutions. For example the option
	<span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">path = /tmp/%u</span>&#8221;</span> is interpreted as <span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">path = /tmp/john</span>&#8221;</span> if the user connected with the
	username john.
	</p><p>
	These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, but there are some general substitutions
	which apply whenever they might be relevant. These are:
	</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">%U</span></dt><dd><p>session username (the username that the client wanted, not
			necessarily the same as the one they got).</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%G</span></dt><dd><p>primary group name of %U.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%h</span></dt><dd><p>the Internet hostname that Samba is running on.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%m</span></dt><dd><p>the NetBIOS name of the client machine (very useful).</p><p>This parameter is not available when Samba listens on port 445, as clients no longer
			send this information. If you use this macro in an include statement on a domain that has
			a Samba domain controller be sure to set in the [global] section <em class="parameter"><code>smb ports =
			139</code></em>. This will cause Samba to not listen on port 445 and will permit include
			functionality to function as it did with Samba 2.x.
			</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%L</span></dt><dd><p>the NetBIOS name of the server. This allows you to change your config based on what
			the client calls you. Your server can have a <span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">dual personality</span>&#8221;</span>.
		</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%M</span></dt><dd><p>the Internet name of the client machine.
		</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%R</span></dt><dd><p>the selected protocol level after protocol negotiation. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS, 
			LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%d</span></dt><dd><p>the process id of the current server
			process.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%a</span></dt><dd><p>
		    The architecture of the remote
		    machine.  It currently recognizes Samba (<code class="constant">Samba</code>), 
		    the Linux CIFS file system (<code class="constant">CIFSFS</code>), OS/2, (<code class="constant">OS2</code>),
		    Mac OS X (<code class="constant">OSX</code>), Windows for Workgroups (<code class="constant">WfWg</code>), Windows 9x/ME 
		    (<code class="constant">Win95</code>), Windows NT (<code class="constant">WinNT</code>),
		    Windows 2000 (<code class="constant">Win2K</code>),
		    Windows XP (<code class="constant">WinXP</code>),
		    Windows XP 64-bit(<code class="constant">WinXP64</code>),
		    Windows 2003 including
		    2003R2 (<code class="constant">Win2K3</code>), and Windows
		    Vista (<code class="constant">Vista</code>).  Anything else will be known as 
		    <code class="constant">UNKNOWN</code>.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%I</span></dt><dd><p>the IP address of the client machine.</p><p>Before 3.6.0 it could contain IPv4 mapped IPv6 addresses,
			now it only contains IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%i</span></dt><dd><p>the local IP address to which a client connected.</p><p>Before 3.6.0 it could contain IPv4 mapped IPv6 addresses,
			now it only contains IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%T</span></dt><dd><p>the current date and time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%D</span></dt><dd><p>name of the domain or workgroup of the current user.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%w</span></dt><dd><p>the winbind separator.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%$(<em class="replaceable"><code>envvar</code></em>)</span></dt><dd><p>the value of the environment variable
		<em class="replaceable"><code>envar</code></em>.</p></dd></dl></div><p>
	The following substitutes apply only to some configuration options (only those that are
	used when a connection has been established):
	</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">%S</span></dt><dd><p>the name of the current service, if any.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%P</span></dt><dd><p>the root directory of the current service, if any.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%u</span></dt><dd><p>username of the current service, if any.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%g</span></dt><dd><p>primary group name of %u.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%H</span></dt><dd><p>the home directory of the user given by %u.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%N</span></dt><dd><p>
			the name of your NIS home directory server.  This is obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. 
			If you have not compiled Samba with the <span class="emphasis"><em>--with-automount</em></span> option, this
			value will be the same as %L.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%p</span></dt><dd><p>
			the path of the service's home directory, obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. The NIS
			auto.map entry is split up as <code class="literal">%N:%p</code>.</p></dd></dl></div><p>
	There are some quite creative things that can be done with these substitutions and other
	<code class="filename">smb.conf</code> options.
	</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="NAME MANGLING"><a name="NAMEMANGLINGSECT"></a><h2>NAME MANGLING</h2><p>
	Samba supports <code class="literal">name mangling</code> so that DOS and Windows clients can use files that don't
	conform to the 8.3 format. It can also be set to adjust the case of 8.3 format filenames.
	</p><p>
	There are several options that control the way mangling is performed, and they are grouped here rather
	than listed separately. For the defaults look at the output of the testparm program.
	</p><p>
	These options can be set separately for each service.
	</p><p>
	The options are:
	</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">case sensitive = yes/no/auto</span></dt><dd><p>
		controls whether filenames are case sensitive. If they aren't, Samba must do a filename search and match on
		passed names. The default setting of auto allows clients that support case sensitive filenames (Linux CIFSVFS
		and smbclient 3.0.5 and above currently) to tell the Samba server on a per-packet basis that they wish to
		access the file system in a case-sensitive manner (to support UNIX case sensitive semantics). No Windows or
		DOS system supports case-sensitive filename so setting this option to auto is that same as setting it to no
		for them. Default <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>.
		</p></dd><dt><span class="term">default case = upper/lower</span></dt><dd><p>
		controls what the default case is for new filenames (ie. files that don't currently exist in the filesystem).
		Default <span class="emphasis"><em>lower</em></span>.  IMPORTANT NOTE: As part of the optimizations for directories containing
		large numbers of files, the following special case applies. If the options
		<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CASESENSITIVE" target="_top">case sensitive = yes</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRESERVECASE" target="_top">preserve case = No</a>, and
		<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHORTPRESERVECASE" target="_top">short preserve case = No</a> are set, then the case of <span class="emphasis"><em>all</em></span>
		incoming client filenames, not just new filenames, will be modified. See additional notes below.
		</p></dd><dt><span class="term">preserve case = yes/no</span></dt><dd><p>
		controls whether new files (ie. files that don't currently exist in the filesystem) are created with the case
		that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the <code class="literal">default</code> case. Default
		<span class="emphasis"><em>yes</em></span>.
		</p></dd><dt><span class="term">short preserve case = yes/no</span></dt><dd><p>
		controls if new files (ie. files that don't currently exist in the filesystem) which conform to 8.3 syntax,
		that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the
		<code class="literal">default</code> case. This option can be used with <code class="literal">preserve case = yes</code> to permit
		long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowercased. Default <span class="emphasis"><em>yes</em></span>.
		</p></dd></dl></div><p>
	By default, Samba 3.0 has the same semantics as a Windows NT server, in that it is case insensitive
	but case preserving. As a special case for directories with large numbers of files, if the case
	options are set as follows, "case sensitive = yes", "case preserve = no", "short preserve case = no"
	then the "default case" option will be applied and will modify all filenames sent from the client
	when accessing this share.
	</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION"><a name="VALIDATIONSECT"></a><h2>NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</h2><p>
	There are a number of ways in which a user can connect to a service. The server uses the following steps
	in determining if it will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the steps fail, the connection
	request is rejected.  However, if one of the steps succeeds, the following steps are not checked.
	</p><p>
	If the service is marked <span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">guest only = yes</span>&#8221;</span> and the server is running with share-level
	security (<span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">security = share</span>&#8221;</span>, steps 1 to 5 are skipped.
	</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
		If the client has passed a username/password pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX 
		system's password programs, the connection is made as that username. This includes the
		<code class="literal">\\server\service</code>%<em class="replaceable"><code>username</code></em> method of passing a username.
		</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
		If the client has previously registered a username with the system and now supplies a correct password for that 
		username, the connection is allowed.
		</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
		The client's NetBIOS name and any previously used usernames are checked against the supplied password. If 
		they match, the connection is allowed as the corresponding user.
		</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
		If the client has previously validated a username/password pair with the server and the client has passed 
		the validation token, that username is used.
		</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
		If a <code class="literal">user = </code> field is given in the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file for the
		service and the client has supplied a password, and that password matches (according to the UNIX system's
		password checking) with one of the usernames from the <code class="literal">user =</code> field, the connection is made as
		the username in the <code class="literal">user =</code> line. If one of the usernames in the <code class="literal">user =</code> list
		begins with a <code class="literal">@</code>, that name expands to a list of names in the group of the same name.
		</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
		If the service is a guest service, a connection is made as the username given in the <code class="literal">guest account
		=</code> for the service, irrespective of the supplied password.
		</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="REGISTRY-BASED CONFIGURATION"><a name="id308136"></a><h2>REGISTRY-BASED CONFIGURATION</h2><p>
		Starting with Samba version 3.2.0, the capability to
		store Samba configuration in the registry is available.
		The configuration is stored in the registry key
		 <span class="emphasis"><em><code class="literal">HKLM\Software\Samba\smbconf</code></em></span>.
		There are two levels of registry configuration:
	</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>Share definitions stored in registry are used.
		This is triggered by setting the global 
		parameter <em class="parameter"><code>registry shares</code></em>
		to <span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">yes</span>&#8221;</span> in <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span>.
		</p><p>The registry shares are loaded not at startup but
		on demand at runtime by <span class="emphasis"><em>smbd</em></span>.
		Shares defined in <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span> take
		priority over shares of the same name defined in
		registry.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Global <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span>
		options stored in registry are used. This can be activated
		in two different ways:</p><p>Firstly, a registry only configuration is triggered
		by setting
		<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CONFIGBACKEND" target="_top">config backend = registry</a>
		in the [global] section of <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span>.
		This resets everything that has been read from config files
		to this point and reads the content of the global configuration
		section from the registry.
		This is the recommended method of using registry based
		configuration.</p><p>Secondly, a mixed configuration can be activated
		by a special new meaning of the parameter
		<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INCLUDE" target="_top">include = registry</a>
		in the [global] section of <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span>.
		This reads the global options from registry with the same
		priorities as for an include of a text file.
		This may be especially useful in cases where an initial
		configuration is needed to access the registry.</p><p>Activation of global registry options automatically
		activates registry shares. So in the registry only case,
		shares are loaded on demand only.</p></li></ol></div><p>
		Note: To make registry-based configurations foolproof
		at least to a certain extent, the use
		of <em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em> and
		 <em class="parameter"><code>config backend</code></em>
		inside the registry configuration has been disabled:
		Especially by changing the
		 <em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em> inside the registry
		configuration, one would create a broken setup where the daemons
		do not see the configuration they loaded once it is active.
	</p><p>
		The registry configuration can be accessed with
		tools like <span class="emphasis"><em>regedit</em></span> or <span class="emphasis"><em>net (rpc)
		registry</em></span> in the key
		 <span class="emphasis"><em><code class="literal">HKLM\Software\Samba\smbconf</code></em></span>.

		More conveniently, the <span class="emphasis"><em>conf</em></span> subcommand of the
		 <a class="citerefentry" href="net.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">net</span>(8)</span></a> utility
		offers a dedicated interface to read and write the
		registry based configuration locally, i.e. directly
		accessing the database file, circumventing the
		server.
	</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER"><a name="id308290"></a><h2>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</h2><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="section" title="abort shutdown script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id308299"></a>

abort shutdown script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id308300"></a><a name="ABORTSHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> that
	should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHUTDOWNSCRIPT" target="_top">shutdown script</a>.</p><p>If the connected user posseses the <code class="constant">SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege</code>,
	right, this command will be run as root.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>abort shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal">""</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>abort shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/sbin/shutdown -c</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="access based share enum (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id308374"></a>

access based share enum (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id308375"></a><a name="ACCESSBASEDSHAREENUM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for a
    service, then the share hosted by the service will only be visible
    to users who have read or write access to the share during share
    enumeration (for example net view \\sambaserver).  This has
    parallels to access based enumeration, the main difference being
    that only share permissions are evaluated, and security
    descriptors on files contained on the share are not used in
    computing enumeration access rights.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>access based share enum</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="acl check permissions (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id308418"></a>

acl check permissions (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id308419"></a><a name="ACLCHECKPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls what <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>does on receiving a protocol request of "open for delete"
    from a Windows client. If a Windows client doesn't have permissions to delete a file then they
    expect this to be denied at open time. POSIX systems normally only detect restrictions on delete by
    actually attempting to delete the file or directory. As Windows clients can (and do) "back out" a
    delete request by unsetting the "delete on close" bit Samba cannot delete the file immediately
    on "open for delete" request as we cannot restore such a deleted file. With this parameter set to
    true (the default) then smbd checks the file system permissions directly on "open for delete" and denies the
    request without actually deleting the file if the file system permissions would seem to deny it.
    This is not perfect, as it's possible a user could have deleted a file without Samba being able to
    check the permissions correctly, but it is close enough to Windows semantics for mostly correct
    behaviour. Samba will correctly check POSIX ACL semantics in this case.
    </p><p>If this parameter is set to "false" Samba doesn't check permissions on "open for delete"
    and allows the open. If the user doesn't have permission to delete the file this will only be
    discovered at close time, which is too late for the Windows user tools to display an error message
    to the user. The symptom of this is files that appear to have been deleted "magically" re-appearing
    on a Windows explorer refresh. This is an extremely advanced protocol option which should not
    need to be changed. This parameter was introduced in its final form in 3.0.21, an earlier version
    with slightly different semantics was introduced in 3.0.20. That older version is not documented here.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl check permissions</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="acl compatibility (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id308489"></a>

acl compatibility (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id308490"></a><a name="ACLCOMPATIBILITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies what OS ACL semantics should 
	be compatible with. Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>winnt</em></span> for Windows NT 4, 
	<span class="emphasis"><em>win2k</em></span> for Windows 2000 and above and <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>.
	If you specify <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, the value for this parameter 
	will be based upon the version of the client. There should 
	be no reason to change this parameter from the default.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl compatibility</code></em> = <code class="literal">Auto</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl compatibility</code></em> = <code class="literal">win2k</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="acl group control (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id308557"></a>

acl group control (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id308558"></a><a name="ACLGROUPCONTROL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	In a POSIX filesystem, only the owner of a file or directory and the superuser can modify the permissions
	and ACLs on a file. If this parameter is set, then Samba overrides this restriction, and also allows the
 	 <span class="emphasis"><em>primary group owner</em></span> of a file or directory to modify the permissions and ACLs
	on that file.
	</p><p>
	On a Windows server, groups may be the owner of a file or directory - thus allowing anyone in
	that group to modify the permissions on it. This allows the delegation of security controls
	on a point in the filesystem to the group owner of a directory and anything below it also owned
	by that group. This means there are multiple people with permissions to modify ACLs on a file
	or directory, easing managability.
	</p><p>
	This parameter allows Samba to also permit delegation of the control over a point in the exported
	directory hierarchy in much the same way as Windows. This allows all members of a UNIX group to
	control the permissions on a file or directory they have group ownership on.
	</p><p>
	This parameter is best used with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INHERITOWNER" target="_top">inherit owner</a> option and also
	on on a share containing directories with the UNIX <span class="emphasis"><em>setgid bit</em></span> set
	on them, which causes new files and directories created within it to inherit the group
	ownership from the containing directory. 
	</p><p>
	This is parameter has been was deprecated in Samba 3.0.23, but re-activated in
	Samba 3.0.31 and above, as it now only controls permission changes if the user
	is in the owning primary group. It is now no longer equivalent to the
	<em class="parameter"><code>dos filemode</code></em> option.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl group control</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="acl map full control (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id308638"></a>

acl map full control (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id308639"></a><a name="ACLMAPFULLCONTROL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> maps a POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" (read/write/execute), the maximum
	allowed POSIX permission set, into a Windows ACL of "FULL CONTROL". If this parameter is set to true any POSIX
	ACE entry of "rwx" will be returned in a Windows ACL as "FULL CONTROL", is this parameter is set to false any
	POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" will be returned as the specific Windows ACL bits representing read, write and
	execute.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl map full control</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add group script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id308686"></a>

add group script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id308687"></a><a name="ADDGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is the full pathname to a script that will be run <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a new group is requested. It
	will expand any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> to the group name passed. This script is only useful
	for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools. The script is free to create a group with
	an arbitrary name to circumvent unix group name restrictions. In that case the script must print the numeric
	gid of the created group on stdout.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add group script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/groupadd %g</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add machine script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id308756"></a>

add machine script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id308758"></a><a name="ADDMACHINESCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is the full pathname to a script that will  be run by
	 <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a machine is
	added to Samba's domain and a Unix account matching the machine's name appended with a "$" does not
	already exist.
	</p><p>This option is very similar to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT" target="_top">add user script</a>, and likewise uses the %u
        substitution for the account name.  Do not use the %m
        substitution.  </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add machine script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add machine script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/adduser -n -g machines -c Machine -d /var/lib/nobody -s /bin/false %u</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add port command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id308829"></a>

add port command (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id308830"></a><a name="ADDPORTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Samba 3.0.23 introduced support for adding printer ports
	remotely using the Windows "Add Standard TCP/IP Port Wizard".
	This option defines an external program to be executed when
	smbd receives a request to add a new Port to the system.
	The script is passed two parameters:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>port name</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>device URI</code></em></p></li></ul></div><p>The deviceURI is in the format of socket://&lt;hostname&gt;[:&lt;portnumber&gt;]
	or lpd://&lt;hostname&gt;/&lt;queuename&gt;.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add port command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add port command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/samba/scripts/addport.sh</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="addprinter command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id308910"></a>

addprinter command (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id308911"></a><a name="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing
    support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add
    Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the 
    "Printers..." folder displayed a share listing.  The APW
    allows for printers to be add remotely to a Samba or Windows 
    NT/2000 print server.</p><p>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be 
    physically added to the underlying printing system.
    The <em class="parameter"><code>addprinter command</code></em>
    defines a script to be run which
    will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer
    to the print system and to add the appropriate service definition 
    to the  <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file in order that it can be 
    shared by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>.</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>addprinter command</code></em> is
    automatically invoked with the following parameter (in 
    order):</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>printer name</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>share name</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>port name</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>driver name</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>location</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>Windows 9x driver location</code></em></p></li></ul></div><p>All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent 
    by the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception.  The "Windows 9x
    driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility
    only.  The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers
    to the APW questions.</p><p>Once the <em class="parameter"><code>addprinter command</code></em> has 
    been executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will reparse the <code class="filename">
    smb.conf</code> to determine if the share defined by the APW
    exists.  If the sharename is still invalid, then <code class="literal">smbd
    </code> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</p><p>
    The <em class="parameter"><code>addprinter command</code></em> program
    can output a single line of text,
    which Samba will set as the port the new printer is connected to. 
    If this line isn't output, Samba won't reload its printer shares.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>addprinter command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>addprinter command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/addprinter</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add share command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309085"></a>

add share command (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309086"></a><a name="ADDSHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server
	Manager.  The <em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> is used to define an external program
	or script which will add a new service definition to
	<code class="filename">smb.conf</code>.
	</p><p>
	In order to successfully execute the
	<em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em>,
	<code class="literal">smbd</code> requires that the administrator
	connects using a root account (i.e.  uid == 0) or has the
	<code class="literal">SeDiskOperatorPrivilege</code>.
	Scripts defined in the <em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em>
	parameter are executed as root.
	</p><p>
	When executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will automatically invoke the
	<em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> with five parameters.
	</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location of the global <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file.
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>shareName</code></em> - the name of the new share.
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>pathName</code></em> - path to an **existing**
			directory on disk.
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> - comment string to associate with the new
			share.
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>max
			connections</code></em>
			Number of maximum simultaneous connections to this
			share.
			</p></li></ul></div><p>
	This parameter is only used to add file shares. To add printer shares, see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" target="_top">addprinter command</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/bin/addshare</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add user script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309261"></a>

add user script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309262"></a><a name="ADDUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is the full pathname to a script that will be run <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> by 
	<a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> 
	under special circumstances described below.
	</p><p>
	Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are created for all users accessing 
	files on this server. For sites that use Windows NT account databases as their primary 
	user database creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the Windows 
	NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows smbd to create the required UNIX users 
	 <span class="emphasis"><em>ON DEMAND</em></span> when a user accesses the Samba server.
	</p><p>
	In order to use this option, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> must <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> be set to 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = share</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT" target="_top">add user script</a> 
	must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX user given one argument of 
	<em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em>, which expands into the UNIX user name to create.
	</p><p>
	When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, at login (session setup in 
	the SMB protocol) time, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> contacts the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" target="_top">password server</a> 
	and attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the authentication 
	succeeds then <code class="literal">smbd</code> attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX 
	password database to map the Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT" target="_top">add user script</a> is set then <code class="literal">smbd</code> will
	call the specified script <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span>, expanding any 
	<em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em> argument to be the user name to create.
	</p><p>
	If this script successfully creates the user then <code class="literal">smbd</code> will 
	continue on as though the UNIX user already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to
	match existing Windows NT accounts.
	</p><p>
	See also <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" target="_top">password server</a>,
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEUSERSCRIPT" target="_top">delete user script</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add user script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add user script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/add_user %u</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add user to group script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309450"></a>

add user to group script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309451"></a><a name="ADDUSERTOGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Full path to the script that will be called when a user is added to a group using the Windows NT domain administration 
	tools. It will be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>
	<span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span>. Any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> will be replaced with the group name and 
	any <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em> will be replaced with the user name.
	</p><p>
	Note that the <code class="literal">adduser</code> command used in the example below does 
	not support the used syntax on all systems. 
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add user to group script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add user to group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/adduser %u %g</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="administrative share (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309533"></a>

administrative share (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309534"></a><a name="ADMINISTRATIVESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> for
      a share, then the share will be an administrative share. The Administrative
      Shares are the default network shares created by all Windows NT-based
      operating systems. These are shares like C$, D$ or ADMIN$. The type of these
      shares is STYPE_DISKTREE_HIDDEN.</p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> for more 
      information about this option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>administrative share</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="admin users (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309586"></a>

admin users (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309587"></a><a name="ADMINUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users who will be granted 
    administrative privileges on the share. This means that they 
    will do all file operations as the super-user (root).</p><p>You should use this option very carefully, as any user in 
    this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, 
    irrespective of file permissions.</p><p>This parameter will not work with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = share</a> in
    Samba 3.0.  This is by design.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>admin users</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>admin users</code></em> = <code class="literal">jason</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="afs share (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309654"></a>

afs share (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309655"></a><a name="AFSSHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether special AFS features are enabled
	for this share. If enabled, it assumes that the directory exported via
	the <em class="parameter"><code>path</code></em> parameter is a local AFS import. The
	special AFS features include the attempt to hand-craft an AFS token
	if you enabled --with-fake-kaserver in configure.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>afs share</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="afs username map (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309699"></a>

afs username map (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309700"></a><a name="AFSUSERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If you are using the fake kaserver AFS feature, you might
	want to hand-craft the usernames you are creating tokens for.
	For example this is necessary if you have users from several domain
	in your AFS Protection Database. One possible scheme to code users
	as DOMAIN+User as it is done by winbind with the + as a separator.
	</p><p>The mapped user name must contain the cell name to log into,
	so without setting this parameter there will be no token.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>afs username map</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>afs username map</code></em> = <code class="literal">%u@afs.samba.org</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="aio read size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309757"></a>

aio read size (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309758"></a><a name="AIOREADSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this
    integer parameter is set to non-zero value,
    Samba will read from file asynchronously when size of request is bigger
    than this value. Note that it happens only for non-chained and non-chaining
    reads and when not using write cache.</p><p>Current implementation of asynchronous I/O in Samba 3.0 does support
    only up to 10 outstanding asynchronous requests, read and write combined.</p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITECACHESIZE" target="_top">write cache size</a></p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#AIOWRITESIZE" target="_top">aio write size</a></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio read size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio read size</code></em> = <code class="literal">16384
#  Use asynchronous I/O for reads bigger than 16KB
    request size</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="aio write behind (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309836"></a>

aio write behind (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309837"></a><a name="AIOWRITEBEHIND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support,
	Samba will not wait until write requests are finished before returning
	the result to the client for files listed in this parameter.
	Instead, Samba will immediately return that the write
	request has been finished successfully, no matter if the
	operation will succeed or not. This might speed up clients without
	aio support, but is really dangerous, because data could be lost
	and files could be damaged.
	</p><p>
	The syntax is identical to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOFILES" target="_top">veto files</a>
	parameter.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio write behind</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio write behind</code></em> = <code class="literal">/*.tmp/</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="aio write size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309902"></a>

aio write size (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309904"></a><a name="AIOWRITESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this
    integer parameter is set to non-zero value,
    Samba will write to file asynchronously when size of request is bigger
    than this value. Note that it happens only for non-chained and non-chaining
    reads and when not using write cache.</p><p>Current implementation of asynchronous I/O in Samba 3.0 does support
    only up to 10 outstanding asynchronous requests, read and write combined.</p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITECACHESIZE" target="_top">write cache size</a></p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#AIOREADSIZE" target="_top">aio read size</a></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio write size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio write size</code></em> = <code class="literal">16384
#  Use asynchronous I/O for writes bigger than 16KB
    request size</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="algorithmic rid base (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id309981"></a>

algorithmic rid base (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id309982"></a><a name="ALGORITHMICRIDBASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This determines how Samba will use its
    algorithmic mapping from uids/gid to the RIDs needed to construct
    NT Security Identifiers.
    </p><p>Setting this option to a larger value could be useful to sites
    transitioning from WinNT and Win2k, as existing user and 
    group rids would otherwise clash with sytem users etc. 
    </p><p>All UIDs and GIDs must be able to be resolved into SIDs for  
    the correct operation of ACLs on the server.  As such the algorithmic
    mapping can't be 'turned off', but pushing it 'out of the way' should
    resolve the issues.  Users and groups can then be assigned 'low' RIDs
    in arbitrary-rid supporting backends.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>algorithmic rid base</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>algorithmic rid base</code></em> = <code class="literal">100000</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="allocation roundup size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310046"></a>

allocation roundup size (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310047"></a><a name="ALLOCATIONROUNDUPSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an administrator to tune the 
    allocation size reported to Windows clients.  The default 
    size of 1Mb generally results in improved Windows client
    performance.   However, rounding the allocation size may cause
    difficulties for some applications, e.g. MS Visual Studio.
    If the MS Visual Studio compiler starts to crash with an
    internal error, set this parameter to zero for this share.
    </p><p>The integer parameter specifies the roundup size in bytes.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>allocation roundup size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1048576</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>allocation roundup size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0
# (to disable roundups)</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="allow insecure wide links (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310110"></a>

allow insecure wide links (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310111"></a><a name="ALLOWINSECUREWIDELINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	In normal operation the option <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDELINKS" target="_top">wide links</a>
	which allows the server to follow symlinks outside of a share path
	is automatically disabled when <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXEXTENSIONS" target="_top">unix extensions</a>
	are enabled on a Samba server. This is done for security purposes
	to prevent UNIX clients creating symlinks to areas of the server
	file system that the administrator does not wish to export.
	</p><p>
	Setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ALLOWINSECUREWIDELINKS" target="_top">allow insecure wide links</a> to
	true disables the link between these two parameters, removing
	this protection and allowing a site to configure
	the server to follow symlinks (by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDELINKS" target="_top">wide links</a>
	to "true") even when <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXEXTENSIONS" target="_top">unix extensions</a>
	is turned on.
	</p><p>
	If is not recommended to enable this option unless you
	fully understand the implications of allowing the server to
	follow symbolic links created by UNIX clients. For most
	normal Samba configurations this would be considered a security
	hole and setting this parameter is not recommended.
	</p><p>
	This option was added at the request of sites who had
	deliberately set Samba up in this way and needed to continue
	supporting this functionality without having to patch the
	Samba code.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>allow insecure wide links</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="allow trusted domains (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310201"></a>

allow trusted domains (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310202"></a><a name="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This option only takes effect when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> option is set to 
    <code class="constant">server</code>, <code class="constant">domain</code> or <code class="constant">ads</code>.  
    If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from 
    a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbd is running 
    in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the remote server 
    doing the authentication.</p><p>This is useful if you only want your Samba server to 
    serve resources to users in the domain it is a member of. As 
    an example, suppose that there are two domains DOMA and DOMB.  DOMB 
    is trusted by DOMA, which contains the Samba server.  Under normal 
    circumstances, a user with an account in DOMB can then access the 
    resources of a UNIX account with the same account name on the 
    Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA.  This 
    can make implementing a security boundary difficult.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>allow trusted domains</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="announce as (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310265"></a>

announce as (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310266"></a><a name="ANNOUNCEAS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what type of server <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse 
    list. By default this is set to Windows NT. The valid options 
    are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"), 
    "NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, 
    Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups 
    respectively. Do not change this parameter unless you have a 
    specific need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server as this 
    may prevent Samba servers from participating as browser servers 
	correctly.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>announce as</code></em> = <code class="literal">NT Server</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>announce as</code></em> = <code class="literal">Win95</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="announce version (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310329"></a>

announce version (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310330"></a><a name="ANNOUNCEVERSION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the major and minor version numbers 
    that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server. The default 
    is 4.9.  Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific 
	need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>announce version</code></em> = <code class="literal">4.9</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>announce version</code></em> = <code class="literal">2.0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="async smb echo handler (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310384"></a>

async smb echo handler (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310385"></a><a name="ASYNCSMBECHOHANDLER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should fork the
	  async smb echo handler. It can be beneficial if your file
	  system can block syscalls for a very long time. In some
	  circumstances, it prolongs the timeout that Windows uses to
	  determine whether a connection is dead.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>async smb echo handler</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="auth methods (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310423"></a>

auth methods (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310424"></a><a name="AUTHMETHODS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This option allows the administrator to chose what authentication methods <code class="literal">smbd</code> 
    will use when authenticating a user. This option defaults to sensible values based on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a>.  
    This should be considered a developer option and used only in rare circumstances.  In the majority (if not all) 
    of production servers, the default setting should be adequate.
    </p><p>
    Each entry in the list attempts to authenticate the user in turn, until
    the user authenticates.  In practice only one method will ever actually 
    be able to complete the authentication.
    </p><p>
    Possible options include <code class="constant">guest</code> (anonymous access), 
    <code class="constant">sam</code> (lookups in local list of accounts based on netbios 
    name or domain name), <code class="constant">winbind</code> (relay authentication requests
    for remote users through winbindd), <code class="constant">ntdomain</code> (pre-winbindd 
    method of authentication for remote domain users; deprecated in favour of winbind method), 
    <code class="constant">trustdomain</code> (authenticate trusted users by contacting the 
    remote DC directly from smbd; deprecated in favour of winbind method).
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>auth methods</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>auth methods</code></em> = <code class="literal">guest sam winbind</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="available (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310518"></a>

available (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310519"></a><a name="AVAILABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If 
	<em class="parameter"><code>available = no</code></em>, then <span class="emphasis"><em>ALL</em></span> 
	attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are 
	logged.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>available</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="bind interfaces only (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310564"></a>

bind interfaces only (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310565"></a><a name="BINDINTERFACESONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter allows the Samba admin 
        to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests. It 
        affects file service <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and name service <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> in a slightly different ways.</p><p>
	For name service it causes <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to bind to ports 137 and 138 on the
	interfaces listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter. <code class="literal">nmbd</code>
	also binds to the "all addresses" interface (0.0.0.0) on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of
	reading broadcast messages.  If this option is not set then <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will
	service name requests on all of these sockets. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#BINDINTERFACESONLY" target="_top">bind interfaces only</a> is set then
	 <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will check the source address of any packets coming in on the
	broadcast sockets and discard any that don't match the broadcast addresses of the interfaces in the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter list.  As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it
	allows <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to refuse to serve names to machines that send packets that
	arrive through any interfaces not listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> list.  IP Source address
	spoofing does defeat this simple check, however, so it must not be used seriously as a security feature for
	 <code class="literal">nmbd</code>.
	</p><p>
	For file service it causes <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> to bind only to the interface list given in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter. This restricts the networks that <code class="literal">smbd</code> will
	serve, to packets coming in on those interfaces.  Note that you should not use this parameter for machines that
	are serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network interfaces as it will not cope with
	non-permanent interfaces.
	</p><p>
	If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#BINDINTERFACESONLY" target="_top">bind interfaces only</a> is set and the network address
	 <span class="emphasis"><em>127.0.0.1</em></span> is not added to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter list
	 <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a> and
	 <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a> may not work as
	expected due to the reasons covered below.
	</p><p>
	To change a users SMB password, the <code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> by default connects to the
	 <span class="emphasis"><em>localhost - 127.0.0.1</em></span> address as an SMB client to issue the password change request. If
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#BINDINTERFACESONLY" target="_top">bind interfaces only</a> is set then unless the network address
	 <span class="emphasis"><em>127.0.0.1</em></span> is added to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter list then <code class="literal"> smbpasswd</code> will fail to connect in it's default mode.  <code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> can be forced to use the primary IP interface of the local host by using
	its <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>	<em class="parameter"><code>-r <em class="replaceable"><code>remote machine</code></em></code></em> parameter, with <em class="replaceable"><code>remote
	machine</code></em> set to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host.
	</p><p>
	The <code class="literal">swat</code> status page tries to connect with <code class="literal">smbd</code> and <code class="literal">nmbd</code> at the address
	<span class="emphasis"><em>127.0.0.1</em></span> to determine if they are running.  Not adding <span class="emphasis"><em>127.0.0.1</em></span>
	will cause <code class="literal"> smbd</code> and <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to always show
	"not running" even if they really are.  This can prevent <code class="literal"> swat</code>
	from starting/stopping/restarting <code class="literal">smbd</code> and <code class="literal">nmbd</code>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>bind interfaces only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="blocking locks (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310861"></a>

blocking locks (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310862"></a><a name="BLOCKINGLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls the behavior 
	of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when given a request by a client 
	to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the 
	request has a time limit associated with it.</p><p>If this parameter is set and the lock range requested 
	cannot be immediately satisfied, samba will internally 
	queue the lock request, and periodically attempt to obtain 
	the lock until the timeout period expires.</p><p>If this parameter is set to <code class="constant">no</code>, then 
	samba will behave as previous versions of Samba would and 
	will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range 
	cannot be obtained.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>blocking locks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="block size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310919"></a>

block size (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310920"></a><a name="BLOCKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when reporting disk free 
    sizes. By default, this reports a disk block size of 1024 bytes.
    </p><p>Changing this parameter may have some effect on the
    efficiency of client writes, this is not yet confirmed. This
    parameter was added to allow advanced administrators to change
    it (usually to a higher value) and test the effect it has on
    client write performance without re-compiling the code. As this
    is an experimental option it may be removed in a future release.
    </p><p>Changing this option does not change the disk free reporting
    size, just the block size unit reported to the client.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>block size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1024</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>block size</code></em> = <code class="literal">4096</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="browsable"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id310991"></a>

<a name="BROWSABLE"></a>browsable
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id310992"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#BROWSEABLE">browseable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="browseable (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311018"></a>

browseable (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311019"></a><a name="BROWSEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether this share is seen in 
	the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>browseable</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="browse list (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311055"></a>

browse list (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311056"></a><a name="BROWSELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will serve a browse list to 
	a client doing a <code class="literal">NetServerEnum</code> call. Normally 
	set to <code class="constant">yes</code>. You should never need to change 
	this.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>browse list</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cache directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311108"></a>

cache directory (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311109"></a><a name="CACHEDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Usually, most of the TDB files are stored in the <em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em>. Since Samba 3.4.0, it is
	possible to differentiate between TDB files with persistent data and
	TDB files with non-persistent data using the
	<em class="parameter"><code>state directory</code></em> and the
	<em class="parameter"><code>cache directory</code></em> options.
	</p><p> This option specifies the directory where TDB files containing
	non-persistent data will be stored.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cache directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/var/locks</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cache directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/samba/locks/cache</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="casesignames"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311182"></a>

<a name="CASESIGNAMES"></a>casesignames
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311183"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#CASESENSITIVE">case sensitive</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="case sensitive (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311208"></a>

case sensitive (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311209"></a><a name="CASESENSITIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>See the discussion in the section <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>case sensitive</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="change notify (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311253"></a>

change notify (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311254"></a><a name="CHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should reply
	to a client's file change notify requests.
	</p><p>You should never need to change this parameter</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>change notify</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="change share command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311294"></a>

change share command (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311295"></a><a name="CHANGESHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server
Manager.  The <em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> is used to define an external
program or script which will modify an existing service definition in <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>.
	</p><p>
	In order to successfully execute the
	<em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em>,
	<code class="literal">smbd</code> requires that the administrator
	connects using a root account (i.e. uid == 0) or has the
	<code class="literal">SeDiskOperatorPrivilege</code>.
	Scripts defined in the <em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em>
	parameter are executed as root.
	</p><p>
	When executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will automatically invoke the
	<em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> with five parameters.
	</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location
			of the global <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file.
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>shareName</code></em> - the name of the new
			share.
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>pathName</code></em> - path to an **existing**
			directory on disk.
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> - comment string to associate
			with the new share.
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>max
			connections</code></em>
			Number of maximum simultaneous connections to this
			share.
			</p></li></ul></div><p>
	This parameter is only used to modify existing file share definitions.
	To modify printer shares, use the "Printers..." folder as seen
	when browsing the Samba host.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/bin/changeshare</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="check password script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311463"></a>

check password script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311464"></a><a name="CHECKPASSWORDSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to check password
    complexity. The password is sent to the program's standard input.</p><p>The program must return 0 on a good password, or any other value
    if the password is bad.
    In case the password is considered weak (the program does not return 0) the
    user will be notified and the password change will fail.</p><p>Note: In the example directory is a sample program called <code class="literal">crackcheck</code>
    that uses cracklib to check the password quality.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>check password script</code></em> = <code class="literal">Disabled</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>check password script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/sbin/crackcheck</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client lanman auth (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311531"></a>

client lanman auth (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311532"></a><a name="CLIENTLANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> and other samba client
    tools will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the
    weaker LANMAN password hash. If disabled, only server which support NT 
    password hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000, Samba, etc... but not 
    Windows 95/98) will be able to be connected from the Samba client.</p><p>The LANMAN encrypted response is easily broken, due to its
    case-insensitive nature, and the choice of algorithm.  Clients
    without Windows 95/98 servers are advised to disable
    this option.  </p><p>Disabling this option will also disable the <code class="literal">client plaintext auth</code> option.</p><p>Likewise, if the <code class="literal">client ntlmv2
    auth</code> parameter is enabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be
    attempted.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client lanman auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client ldap sasl wrapping (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311601"></a>

client ldap sasl wrapping (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311602"></a><a name="CLIENTLDAPSASLWRAPPING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTLDAPSASLWRAPPING" target="_top">client ldap sasl wrapping</a> defines whether
	ldap traffic will be signed or signed and encrypted (sealed). 
	Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>plain</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>sign</em></span> 
	and <span class="emphasis"><em>seal</em></span>. 	
	</p><p>
	The values <span class="emphasis"><em>sign</em></span> and <span class="emphasis"><em>seal</em></span> are 
	only available if Samba has been compiled against a modern 
	OpenLDAP version (2.3.x or higher).
	</p><p>
	This option is needed in the case of Domain Controllers enforcing 
	the usage of signed LDAP connections (e.g. Windows 2000 SP3 or higher).
	LDAP sign and seal can be controlled with the registry key
	"<code class="literal">HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\</code>
	<code class="literal">NTDS\Parameters\LDAPServerIntegrity</code>"
	on the Windows server side.  
	</p><p>
	Depending on the used KRB5 library (MIT and older Heimdal versions)
	it is possible that the message "integrity only" is not supported. 
	In this case, <span class="emphasis"><em>sign</em></span> is just an alias for 
	<span class="emphasis"><em>seal</em></span>.
	</p><p>
	The default value is <span class="emphasis"><em>plain</em></span> which is not irritable 
	to KRB5 clock skew errors. That implies synchronizing the time
	with the KDC in the case of using <span class="emphasis"><em>sign</em></span> or 
	<span class="emphasis"><em>seal</em></span>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client ldap sasl wrapping</code></em> = <code class="literal">plain</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client ntlmv2 auth (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311707"></a>

client ntlmv2 auth (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311708"></a><a name="CLIENTNTLMV2AUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to
    authenticate itself to servers using the NTLMv2 encrypted password
    response.</p><p>If enabled, only an NTLMv2 and LMv2 response (both much more
    secure than earlier versions) will be sent.  Older servers
    (including NT4 &lt; SP4, Win9x and Samba 2.2) are not compatible with
    NTLMv2 when not in an NTLMv2 supporting domain</p><p>Similarly, if enabled, NTLMv1, <code class="literal">client lanman auth</code> and <code class="literal">client plaintext auth</code>
    authentication will be disabled.  This also disables share-level 
    authentication. </p><p>If disabled, an NTLM response (and possibly a LANMAN response)
    will be sent by the client, depending on the value of <code class="literal">client lanman auth</code>.  </p><p>Note that Windows Vista and later versions already use
    NTLMv2 by default, and some sites (particularly those following
    'best practice' security polices) only allow NTLMv2 responses, and
    not the weaker LM or NTLM.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client ntlmv2 auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client plaintext auth (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311787"></a>

client plaintext auth (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311788"></a><a name="CLIENTPLAINTEXTAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies whether a client should send a plaintext 
		password if the server does not support encrypted passwords.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client plaintext auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client schannel (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311825"></a>

client schannel (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311826"></a><a name="CLIENTSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This controls whether the client offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel.
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL" target="_top">client schannel = no</a> does not offer the schannel, 
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL" target="_top">client schannel = auto</a> offers the schannel but does not
    enforce it, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL" target="_top">client schannel = yes</a> denies access 
    if the server is not able to speak netlogon schannel. 
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client schannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client schannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client signing (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311900"></a>

client signing (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311901"></a><a name="CLIENTSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB signing. Possible values 
    are <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>mandatory</em></span> 
    and <span class="emphasis"><em>disabled</em></span>. 
    </p><p>When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced. 
    When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set 
	to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either.
</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client signing</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client use spnego principal (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id311952"></a>

client use spnego principal (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id311953"></a><a name="CLIENTUSESPNEGOPRINCIPAL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not
    <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> and other samba components
    acting as a client will attempt to use the server-supplied
    principal sometimes given in the SPNEGO exchange.</p><p>If enabled, Samba can attempt to use Kerberos to contact
    servers known only by IP address.  Kerberos relies on names, so
    ordinarily cannot function in this situation. </p><p>If disabled, Samba will use the name used to look up the
    server when asking the KDC for a ticket.  This avoids situations
    where a server may impersonate another, soliciting authentication
    as one principal while being known on the network as another.
    </p><p>Note that Windows XP SP2 and later versions already follow
    this behaviour, and Windows Vista and later servers no longer
    supply this 'rfc4178 hint' principal on the server side.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client use spnego principal</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client use spnego (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312013"></a>

client use spnego (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312014"></a><a name="CLIENTUSESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This variable controls whether Samba clients will try 
    to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with 
    supporting servers (including WindowsXP, Windows2000 and Samba
    3.0) to agree upon an authentication
    mechanism.  This enables Kerberos authentication in particular.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client use spnego</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cluster addresses (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312052"></a>

cluster addresses (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312053"></a><a name="CLUSTERADDRESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With this parameter you can add additional addresses
	nmbd will register with a WINS server. These addresses are not
	necessarily present on all nodes simultaneously, but they will
	be registered with the WINS server so that clients can contact
	any of the nodes.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cluster addresses</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cluster addresses</code></em> = <code class="literal">10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.3</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="clustering (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312106"></a>

clustering (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312107"></a><a name="CLUSTERING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should contact
	ctdb for accessing its tdb files and use ctdb as a backend
	for its messaging backend.
	</p><p>Set this parameter to <code class="literal">yes</code> only if
	you have a cluster setup with ctdb running.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>clustering</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="comment (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312153"></a>

comment (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312154"></a><a name="COMMENT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a text field that is seen next to a share 
	when a client does a queries the server, either via the network 
	neighborhood or via <code class="literal">net view</code> to list what shares 
	are available.</p><p>If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the 
		machine name then see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSTRING" target="_top">server string</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# No comment</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> = <code class="literal">Fred's Files</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="config backend (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312224"></a>

config backend (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312225"></a><a name="CONFIGBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
		This controls the backend for storing the configuration.
		Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>file</em></span> (the default)
		and <span class="emphasis"><em>registry</em></span>.
		When <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CONFIGBACKEND" target="_top">config backend = registry</a>
		 is encountered while loading <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span>,
		the configuration read so far is dropped and the global
		options are read from registry instead. So this triggers a
		registry only configuration. Share definitions are not read
		immediately but instead <em class="parameter"><code>registry
		shares</code></em> is set to <span class="emphasis"><em>yes</em></span>.
	</p><p>
		Note: This option can not be set inside the registry
		configuration itself.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>config backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">file</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>config backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">registry</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="config file (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312308"></a>

config file (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312309"></a><a name="CONFIGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the config file 
	to use, instead of the default (usually <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>). 
	There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set 
	in the config file!</p><p>For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed 
	when the parameters are loaded then it will reload them from 
	the new config file.</p><p>This option takes the usual substitutions, which can 
	be very useful.</p><p>If the config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded 
	(allowing you to special case the config files of just a few 
	clients).</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>config file</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="copy (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312368"></a>

copy (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312369"></a><a name="COPY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows you to "clone" service 
	entries. The specified service is simply duplicated under the 
	current service's name. Any parameters specified in the current 
	section will override those in the section being copied.</p><p>This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and 
	create similar services easily. Note that the service being 
	copied must occur earlier in the configuration file than the 
	service doing the copying.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>copy</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>copy</code></em> = <code class="literal">otherservice</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="create krb5 conf (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312427"></a>

create krb5 conf (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312428"></a><a name="CREATEKRB5CONF"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Setting this paramter to <code class="literal">no</code> prevents
	winbind from creating custom krb5.conf files. Winbind normally does
	this because the krb5 libraries are not AD-site-aware and thus would
	pick any domain controller out of potentially very many. Winbind
	is site-aware and makes the krb5 libraries use a local DC by
	creating its own krb5.conf files.
	</p><p>
	Preventing winbind from doing this might become necessary if you
	have to add special options into your system-krb5.conf that winbind
	does not see.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>create krb5 conf</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="create mode"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312476"></a>

<a name="CREATEMODE"></a>create mode
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312478"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#CREATEMASK">create mask</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="create mask (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312503"></a>

create mask (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312504"></a><a name="CREATEMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	When a file is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to
	UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter. This parameter may
	be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> set here will
	be removed from the modes set on a file when it is created.
	</p><p>
	The default value of this parameter removes the <code class="literal">group</code> and <code class="literal">other</code>
	write and execute bits from the UNIX modes.
	</p><p>
	Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from this parameter with the value of the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE" target="_top">force create mode</a> parameter which is set to 000 by default.
	</p><p>
	This parameter does not affect directory masks. See the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK" target="_top">directory mask</a>
	for details.
	</p><p>
	Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the
	administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK" target="_top">security mask</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>create mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0744</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>create mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0775</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="csc policy (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312611"></a>

csc policy (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312612"></a><a name="CSCPOLICY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This stands for <span class="emphasis"><em>client-side caching policy</em></span>, and specifies how clients capable of offline
	caching will cache the files in the share. The valid values are: manual, documents, programs, disable.
	</p><p>
	These values correspond to those used on Windows servers.
	</p><p>
	For example, shares containing roaming profiles can have offline caching disabled using 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CSCPOLICY" target="_top">csc policy = disable</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>csc policy</code></em> = <code class="literal">manual</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>csc policy</code></em> = <code class="literal">programs</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ctdbd socket (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312683"></a>

ctdbd socket (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312684"></a><a name="CTDBDSOCKET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If you set <code class="literal">clustering=yes</code>,
	you need to tell Samba where ctdbd listens on its unix domain
	socket. The default path as of ctdb 1.0 is /tmp/ctdb.socket which
	you have to explicitly set for Samba in smb.conf.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ctdbd socket</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ctdbd socket</code></em> = <code class="literal">/tmp/ctdb.socket</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ctdb locktime warn threshold (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312742"></a>

ctdb locktime warn threshold (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312743"></a><a name="CTDBLOCKTIMEWARNTHRESHOLD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	In a cluster environment using Samba and ctdb it is critical
	that locks on central ctdb-hosted databases like locking.tdb
	are not held for long. With the current Samba architecture
	it happens that Samba takes a lock and while holding that
	lock makes file system calls into the shared cluster file
	system. This option makes Samba warn if it detects that it
	has held locks for the specified number of milliseconds. If
	this happens, <span class="emphasis"><em>smbd</em></span> will emit a debug level 0
	message into its logs and potentially into syslog. The most likely
	reason for such a log message is that an operation of the cluster
	file system Samba exports is taking longer than expected.
	The messages are meant as a debugging aid for potential
	cluster problems.
	</p><p>The default value of 0 disables this logging.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ctdb locktime warn threshold</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ctdb timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312791"></a>

ctdb timeout (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312792"></a><a name="CTDBTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a timeout in seconds for the
	  connection between Samba and ctdb. It is only valid if you
	  have compiled Samba with clustering and if you have
	  set <em class="parameter"><code>clustering=yes</code></em>.
	</p><p>When something in the cluster blocks, it can happen that
	  we wait indefinitely long for ctdb, just adding to the
	  blocking condition. In a well-running cluster this should
	  never happen, but there are too many components in a cluster
	  that might have hickups. Choosing the right balance for this
	  value is very tricky, because on a busy cluster long service
	  times to transfer something across the cluster might be
	  valid. Setting it too short will degrade the service your
	  cluster presents, setting it too long might make the cluster
	  itself not recover from something severely broken for too
	  long.
	</p><p>
	  Be aware that if you set this parameter, this needs to be in
	  the file smb.conf, it is not really helpful to put this into
	  a registry configuration (typical on a cluster), because to
	  access the registry contact to ctdb is requred.
	</p><p>Setting <em class="parameter"><code>ctdb timeout</code></em> to n makes
	  any process waiting longer than n seconds for a reply by the
	  cluster panic. Setting it to 0 (the default) makes Samba
	  block forever, which is the highly recommended default.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ctdb timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cups connection timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312859"></a>

cups connection timeout (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312860"></a><a name="CUPSCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">cups</code>.
    </p><p>
   If set, this option specifies the number of seconds that smbd will wait
   whilst trying to contact to the CUPS server. The connection will fail
   if it takes longer than this number of seconds.
   </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups connection timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">30</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups connection timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">60</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cups encrypt (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312927"></a>

cups encrypt (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312928"></a><a name="CUPSENCRYPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a>
	is set to <code class="constant">cups</code> and if you use CUPS newer than
	1.0.x.It is used to define whether or not Samba should use encryption
	when talking to the CUPS server. Possible values are
	<span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>yes</em></span> and
	<span class="emphasis"><em>no</em></span>
	</p><p>
	When set to auto we will try to do a TLS handshake on each CUPS
	connection setup. If that fails, we will fall back to unencrypted
	operation.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups encrypt</code></em> = <code class="literal">"no"</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cups options (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id312990"></a>

cups options (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id312991"></a><a name="CUPSOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is 
    set to <code class="constant">cups</code>.  Its value is a free form string of options
    passed directly to the cups library.  
    </p><p>
   You can pass any generic print option known to CUPS (as listed
   in the CUPS "Software Users' Manual").  You can also pass any printer
   specific option (as listed in "lpoptions -d printername -l")
   valid for the target queue.
   Multiple parameters should be space-delimited name/value pairs according to
   the PAPI text option ABNF specification. Collection values
   ("name={a=... b=... c=...}") are stored with the curley brackets intact.
   </p><p>
   You should set this parameter to <code class="constant">raw</code> if your CUPS server 
   <code class="filename">error_log</code> file contains messages such as
   "Unsupported format 'application/octet-stream'" when printing from a Windows client 
   through Samba.  It is no longer necessary to enable
   system wide raw printing in <code class="filename">/etc/cups/mime.{convs,types}</code>.
   </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups options</code></em> = <code class="literal">""</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups options</code></em> = <code class="literal">"raw media=a4"</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cups server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313079"></a>

cups server (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313080"></a><a name="CUPSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">cups</code>.
    </p><p>
   If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS <code class="filename">client.conf</code>. This is 
   necessary if you have virtual samba servers that connect to different CUPS daemons.
   </p><p>Optionally, a port can be specified by separating the server name 
	   and port number with a colon. If no port was specified, 
	   the default port for IPP (631) will be used.
   </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups server</code></em> = <code class="literal">""</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups server</code></em> = <code class="literal">mycupsserver</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups server</code></em> = <code class="literal">mycupsserver:1631</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="deadtime (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313172"></a>

deadtime (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313173"></a><a name="DEADTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) 
    represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection 
    is considered dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes 
    effect if the number of open files is zero.</p><p>This is useful to stop a server's resources being 
    exhausted by a large number of inactive connections.</p><p>Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a 
    connection is broken so in most cases this parameter should be 
    transparent to users.</p><p>Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes 
    is recommended for most systems.</p><p>A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection 
		should be performed.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>deadtime</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>deadtime</code></em> = <code class="literal">15</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug class (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313242"></a>

debug class (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313244"></a><a name="DEBUGCLASS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    With this boolean parameter enabled, the debug class (DBGC_CLASS) 
    will be displayed in the debug header.
    </p><p>
    For more information about currently available debug classes, see
    section about <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGLEVEL" target="_top">log level</a>.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug class</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug hires timestamp (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313292"></a>

debug hires timestamp (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313294"></a><a name="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this 
    boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp  message header when turned on.
    </p><p>
    Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug hires timestamp</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug pid (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313342"></a>

debug pid (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313343"></a><a name="DEBUGPID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    When using only one log file for more then one forked <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>-process there may be hard to follow which process outputs which 
    message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id to the timestamp message headers in the
    logfile when turned on.
    </p><p>
    Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug pid</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug prefix timestamp (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313399"></a>

debug prefix timestamp (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313400"></a><a name="DEBUGPREFIXTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    With this option enabled, the timestamp message header is prefixed to the debug message without the
    filename and function information that is included with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> 
    parameter. This gives timestamps to the messages without adding an additional line.
    </p><p>
    Note that this parameter overrides the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> parameter.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug prefix timestamp</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="timestamp logs"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313456"></a>

<a name="TIMESTAMPLOGS"></a>timestamp logs
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313457"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug timestamp (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313482"></a>

debug timestamp (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313483"></a><a name="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    Samba debug log messages are timestamped by default. If you are running at a high 
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGLEVEL" target="_top">debug level</a> these timestamps can be distracting. This 
    boolean parameter allows timestamping to be turned off.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug timestamp</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug uid (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313528"></a>

debug uid (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313529"></a><a name="DEBUGUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the 
    current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers in the log file if turned on.
    </p><p>
    Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug uid</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dedicated keytab file (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313577"></a>

dedicated keytab file (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313578"></a><a name="DEDICATEDKEYTABFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	  Specifies the path to the kerberos keytab file when
	  <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#KERBEROSMETHOD" target="_top">kerberos method</a> is set to "dedicated
	  keytab".
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dedicated keytab file</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dedicated keytab file</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/etc/krb5.keytab</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="default case (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313636"></a>

default case (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313637"></a><a name="DEFAULTCASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>.
	Also note the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHORTPRESERVECASE" target="_top">short preserve case</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default case</code></em> = <code class="literal">lower</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="default devmode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313687"></a>

default devmode (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313688"></a><a name="DEFAULTDEVMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only applicable to <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE" target="_top">printable</a> services.
    When smbd is serving Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba
    server has a Device Mode which defines things such as paper size and
    orientation and duplex settings.  The device mode can only correctly be
    generated by the printer driver itself (which can only be executed on a
    Win32 platform).  Because smbd is unable to execute the driver code
    to generate the device mode, the default behavior is to set this field
    to NULL.
    </p><p>Most problems with serving printer drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients
    can be traced to a problem with the generated device mode.  Certain drivers
    will do things such as crashing the client's Explorer.exe with a NULL devmode.
    However, other printer drivers can cause the client's spooler service
    (spoolsv.exe) to die if the devmode was not created by the driver itself
    (i.e. smbd generates a default devmode).
    </p><p>This parameter should be used with care and tested with the printer
    driver in question.  It is better to leave the device mode to NULL
    and let the Windows client set the correct values.  Because drivers do not
    do this all the time, setting <code class="literal">default devmode = yes</code>
    will instruct smbd to generate a default one.
    </p><p>For more information on Windows NT/2k printing and Device Modes,
    see the <a class="ulink" href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/" target="_top">MSDN documentation</a>.
</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default devmode</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="default"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313762"></a>

<a name="DEFAULT"></a>default
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313763"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DEFAULTSERVICE">default service</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="default service (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313788"></a>

default service (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313789"></a><a name="DEFAULTSERVICE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a service
	which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot
	be found. Note that the square brackets are <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span>
	given in the parameter value (see example below).</p><p>There is no default value for this parameter. If this 
	parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent 
	service results in an error.</p><p>
	Typically the default service would be a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READ-ONLY" target="_top">read-only</a> service.</p><p>Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal
	that of the requested service, this is very useful as it allows you to use macros like <em class="parameter"><code>%S</code></em> to make a wildcard service.
	</p><p>Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service 
	used in the default service will get mapped to a "/". This allows for
	interesting things.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default service</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default service</code></em> = <code class="literal">pub</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="defer sharing violations (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313882"></a>

defer sharing violations (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313883"></a><a name="DEFERSHARINGVIOLATIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Windows allows specifying how a file will be shared with 
	other processes when it is opened. Sharing violations occur when 
	a file is opened by a different process using options that violate 
	the share settings specified by other processes. This parameter causes
	smbd to act as a Windows server does, and defer returning a "sharing
	violation" error message for up to one second, allowing the client
	to close the file causing the violation in the meantime.
	</p><p>UNIX by default does not have this behaviour.</p><p>
	There should be no reason to turn off this parameter, as it is
	designed to enable Samba to more correctly emulate Windows.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>defer sharing violations</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete group script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313934"></a>

delete group script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313935"></a><a name="DELETEGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the full pathname to a script that will 
	be run <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a group is requested to be deleted. 
	It will expand any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> to the group name passed.  
	This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete group script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="deleteprinter command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id313987"></a>

deleteprinter command (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id313988"></a><a name="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer
    support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now 
    possible to delete a printer at run time by issuing the
    DeletePrinter() RPC call.</p><p>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be 
    physically deleted from the underlying printing system.  The
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" target="_top">deleteprinter command</a> defines a script to be run which 
    will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer
    from the print system and from <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>.
    </p><p>The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" target="_top">deleteprinter command</a> is 
    automatically called with only one parameter: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERNAME" target="_top">printer name</a>.
	</p><p>Once the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" target="_top">deleteprinter command</a> has 
    been executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will reparse the <code class="filename">
    smb.conf</code> to check that the associated printer no longer exists.
    If the sharename is still valid, then <code class="literal">smbd
    </code> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>deleteprinter command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>deleteprinter command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/removeprinter</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete readonly (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314104"></a>

delete readonly (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314105"></a><a name="DELETEREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted.  
	This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.</p><p>This option may be useful for running applications such 
	as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file 
	permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete readonly</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete share command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314147"></a>

delete share command (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314148"></a><a name="DELETESHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server
	Manager.  The <em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> is used to define an external
	program or script which will remove an existing service definition from
	<code class="filename">smb.conf</code>.
	</p><p>In order to successfully execute the
	<em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em>,
	<code class="literal">smbd</code>	requires that the administrator
	connects using a root account (i.e.  uid == 0) or has the
	<code class="literal">SeDiskOperatorPrivilege</code>.
	Scripts defined in the <em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em>
	parameter are executed as root.
	</p><p>
	When executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will automatically invoke the
	<em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> with two parameters.
	</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location
			of the global <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file.
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>shareName</code></em> - the name of
			the existing service.
			</p></li></ul></div><p>
	This parameter is only used to remove file shares.  To delete printer shares,
	see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" target="_top">deleteprinter command</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/bin/delshare</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete user from group script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314290"></a>

delete user from group script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314291"></a><a name="DELETEUSERFROMGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Full path to the script that will be called when 
	a user is removed from a group using the Windows NT domain administration 
	tools. It will be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span>. 
	Any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> will be replaced with the group name and 
	any <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em> will be replaced with the user name.
</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete user from group script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete user from group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/deluser %u %g</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete user script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314364"></a>

delete user script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314365"></a><a name="DELETEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the full pathname to a script that will 
	be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when managing users 
	with remote RPC (NT) tools.
	</p><p>This script is called when a remote client removes a user
	from the server, normally using 'User Manager for Domains' or
	<code class="literal">rpcclient</code>.</p><p>This script should delete the given UNIX username.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete user script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete user script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/del_user %u</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete veto files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314437"></a>

delete veto files (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314438"></a><a name="DELETEVETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used when Samba is attempting to 
	delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories 
	(see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOFILES" target="_top">veto files</a>
	option).  If this option is set to <code class="constant">no</code> (the default) then if a vetoed 
	directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the 
	directory delete will fail. This is usually what you want.</p><p>If this option is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, then Samba 
	will attempt to recursively delete any files and directories within 
	the vetoed directory. This can be useful for integration with file 
	serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within 
	directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing 
	(e.g. <code class="filename">.AppleDouble</code>)</p><p>Setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEVETOFILES" target="_top">delete veto files = yes</a> allows these 
	directories to be  transparently deleted when the parent directory 
	is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete veto files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dfree cache time (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314512"></a>

dfree cache time (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314513"></a><a name="DFREECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	The <em class="parameter"><code>dfree cache time</code></em> should only be used on systems where a problem
	occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur
	with other operating systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the
	end of each directory listing.
	</p><p>
	This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version 3.0.21.  It specifies in seconds the time that smbd will
	cache the output of a disk free query. If set to zero (the default) no caching is done. This allows a heavily
	loaded server to prevent rapid spawning of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DFREECOMMAND" target="_top">dfree command</a> scripts increasing the load.
	</p><p>
	By default this parameter is zero, meaning no caching will be done.
	</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dfree cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">dfree cache time = 60</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dfree command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314578"></a>

dfree command (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314579"></a><a name="DFREECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	The <em class="parameter"><code>dfree command</code></em> setting should only be used on systems where a
	problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, but may
	occur with other operating systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore"
	at the end of each directory listing.
	</p><p>
	This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to calculate the total disk space and amount
	available with an external routine. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill this
	function.
	</p><p>
	In Samba version 3.0.21 this parameter has been changed to be a per-share parameter, and in addition the
	parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DFREECACHETIME" target="_top">dfree cache time</a> was added to allow the output of this script to be cached
	for systems under heavy load.
	</p><p>
	The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating a directory in the filesystem being queried.
	This will typically consist of the string <code class="filename">./</code>. The script should return
	two integers in ASCII. The first should be the total disk space in blocks, and the second should be the number
	of available blocks. An optional third return value can give the block size in bytes. The default blocksize is
	1024 bytes.
	</p><p>
	Note: Your script should <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> be setuid or setgid and should be owned by (and writeable
	only by) root!
	</p><p>
	Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:
</p><pre class="programlisting"> 
#!/bin/sh
df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $(NF-4),$(NF-2)}'
</pre><p>
	or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):
</p><pre class="programlisting"> 
#!/bin/sh
/usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}'
</pre><p>
	Note that you may have to replace the command names with full path names on some systems.
	</p><p>
	By default internal routines for determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used.
	</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dfree command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/dfree</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="directory mode"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314684"></a>

<a name="DIRECTORYMODE"></a>directory mode
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314685"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DIRECTORYMASK">directory mask</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="directory mask (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314710"></a>

directory mask (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314711"></a><a name="DIRECTORYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is the octal modes which are 
    used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX 
    directories.</p><p>When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are 
    calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, 
    and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this 
    parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for 
    the UNIX modes of a directory. Any bit <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> set 
    here will be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is 
    created.</p><p>The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' 
    and 'other' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the 
    user who owns the directory to modify it.</p><p>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode 
    created from this parameter with the value of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" target="_top">force directory mode</a> parameter. 
    This parameter is set to 000 by default (i.e. no extra mode bits are added).</p><p>Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions
    set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce
    a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" target="_top">directory security mask</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0755</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0775</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="directory name cache size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314804"></a>

directory name cache size (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314805"></a><a name="DIRECTORYNAMECACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter specifies the the size of the directory name cache.
	It will be needed to turn this off for *BSD systems.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory name cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">100</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="directory security mask (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314842"></a>

directory security mask (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314843"></a><a name="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits
    will be set when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX
    permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog
    box.</p><p>
	This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the incoming permission bits, thus resetting
        any bits not in this mask.  Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" target="_top">force  directory security mode</a>, which works similar like this one but uses logical OR instead of AND.
	Essentially, zero bits in this mask are a set of bits that will always be set to zero.
	</p><p>
	Essentially, all bits set to zero in this mask will result in setting to zero the corresponding bits on the
	file permissions regardless of the previous status of this bits on the file.
    </p><p>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0777
    meaning a user is allowed to set all the user/group/world
    permissions on a directory.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Note</em></span> that users who can access the 
    Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, 
    so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.  
    Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave
	it as the default of <code class="constant">0777</code>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory security mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0777</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory security mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0700</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="disable netbios (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314930"></a>

disable netbios (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314931"></a><a name="DISABLENETBIOS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support
    in Samba. Netbios is the only available form of browsing in 
    all windows versions except for 2000 and XP. </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Clients that only support netbios won't be able to 
    see your samba server when netbios support is disabled.
	</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>disable netbios</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="disable spoolss (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id314974"></a>

disable spoolss (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id314975"></a><a name="DISABLESPOOLSS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Enabling this parameter will disable Samba's support
    for the SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC's and will yield identical behavior
    as Samba 2.0.x.  Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using
    Lanman style printing commands. Windows 9x/ME will be unaffected by
    the parameter. However, this will also disable the ability to upload
    printer drivers to a Samba server via the Windows NT Add Printer
    Wizard or by using the NT printer properties dialog window.  It will
    also disable the capability of Windows NT/2000 clients to download
    print drivers from the Samba host upon demand.
    <span class="emphasis"><em>Be very careful about enabling this parameter.</em></span>
</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>disable spoolss</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="display charset (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id265642"></a>

display charset (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id265643"></a><a name="DISPLAYCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Specifies the charset that samba will use to print messages to stdout and stderr.
	The default value is "LOCALE", which means automatically set, depending on the
	current locale. The value should generally be the same as the value of the parameter
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXCHARSET" target="_top">unix charset</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>display charset</code></em> = <code class="literal">"LOCALE" or "ASCII" (depending on the system)</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>display charset</code></em> = <code class="literal">UTF8</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dmapi support (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315156"></a>

dmapi support (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315157"></a><a name="DMAPISUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should use DMAPI to
	determine whether a file is offline or not. This would typically
	be used in conjunction with a hierarchical storage system that
	automatically migrates files to tape.
	</p><p>Note that Samba infers the status of a file by examining the
	events that a DMAPI application has registered interest in. This
	heuristic is satisfactory for a number of hierarchical storage
	systems, but there may be system for which it will fail. In this
	case, Samba may erroneously report files to be offline.
	</p><p>This parameter is only available if a supported DMAPI
	implementation was found at compilation time. It will only be used
	if DMAPI is found to enabled on the system at run time.
	</p><p>
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dmapi support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dns proxy (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315208"></a>

dns proxy (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315209"></a><a name="DNSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies that <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server and 
	finding that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should treat the 
	NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS name and do a lookup with the DNS server 
	for that name on behalf of the name-querying client.</p><p>Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 
	characters, so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be 
	15 characters, maximum.</p><p><code class="literal">nmbd</code> spawns a second copy of itself to do the
	DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking 
	action.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dns proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="domain logons (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315268"></a>

domain logons (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315269"></a><a name="DOMAINLOGONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, the Samba server will
	provide the netlogon service for Windows 9X network logons for the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> it is in.
	This will also cause the Samba server to act as a domain
	controller for NT4 style domain services. For more details on
	setting up this feature see the Domain Control chapter of the
	Samba HOWTO Collection.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>domain logons</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="domain master (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315318"></a>

domain master (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315319"></a><a name="DOMAINMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Tell <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> to enable
	WAN-wide browse list collation. Setting this option causes <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to claim a
	special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a domain master browser for its given
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a>. Local master browsers in the same <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> on
	broadcast-isolated subnets will give this <code class="literal">nmbd</code> their local browse lists,
	and then ask <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> for a
	complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area network.  Browser clients will then contact their
	local master browser, and will receive the domain-wide browse list, instead of just the list for their
	broadcast-isolated subnet.
	</p><p>
	Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to claim this <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> specific special NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for that
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> by default (i.e. there is no way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting
	to do this). This means that if this parameter is set and <code class="literal">nmbd</code> claims the
	special name for a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> before a Windows NT PDC is able to do so then cross
	subnet browsing will behave strangely and may fail.
	</p><p>
	If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS" target="_top">domain logons = yes</a>, then the default behavior is to enable the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER" target="_top">domain master</a> parameter.  If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS" target="_top">domain logons</a> is not enabled (the
	default setting), then neither will <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER" target="_top">domain master</a> be enabled by default.
	</p><p>
	When <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS" target="_top">domain logons = Yes</a> the default setting for this parameter is
	Yes, with the result that Samba will be a PDC. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER" target="_top">domain master = No</a>,
	Samba will function as a BDC. In general, this parameter should be set to 'No' only on a BDC.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>domain master</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dont descend (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315485"></a>

dont descend (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315486"></a><a name="DONTDESCEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>There are certain directories on some systems 
	(e.g., the <code class="filename">/proc</code> tree under Linux) that are either not 
	of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive). This 
	parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list of directories 
	that the server should always show as empty.</p><p>Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format 
	of the "dont descend" entries. For example you may need <code class="filename">
	./proc</code> instead of just <code class="filename">/proc</code>. 
	Experimentation is the best policy :-)  </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dont descend</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dont descend</code></em> = <code class="literal">/proc,/dev</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dos charset (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315559"></a>

dos charset (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315560"></a><a name="DOSCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>DOS SMB clients assume the server has 
	the same charset as they do. This option specifies which 
	charset Samba should talk to DOS clients.
	</p><p>The default depends on which charsets you have installed. 
	Samba tries to use charset 850 but falls back to ASCII in 
	case it is not available. Run <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a> to check the default on your system.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dos filemode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315597"></a>

dos filemode (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315598"></a><a name="DOSFILEMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The default behavior in Samba is to provide
	UNIX-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is
	able to change the permissions on it.  However, this behavior
	is often confusing to  DOS/Windows users.  Enabling this parameter
	allows a user who has write access to the file (by whatever
	means, including an ACL permission) to modify the permissions
	(including ACL) on it. Note that a user belonging to the group
	owning the file will not be allowed to change permissions if
	the group is only granted read access. Ownership of the
	file/directory may also be changed.

	Note that using the VFS modules acl_xattr or acl_tdb which store native
	Windows as meta-data will automatically turn this option on for any
	share for which they are loaded, as they require this option to emulate
	Windows ACLs correctly.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dos filemode</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dos filetime resolution (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315641"></a>

dos filetime resolution (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315642"></a><a name="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest 
	granularity on time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter 
	for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the 
	nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second 
	resolution is made to <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>.</p><p>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual 
	C++ when used against Samba shares. If oplocks are enabled on a 
	share, Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a 
	file has changed since it was last read. One of these calls uses a
	one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity. As
	the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a
	timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not
	match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has changed. Setting
	this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is
	happy.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dos filetime resolution</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dos filetimes (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315696"></a>

dos filetimes (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315698"></a><a name="DOSFILETIMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a 
	file they can change the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics, 
	only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp. By 
	default, Samba emulates the DOS semantics and allows to change the 
	timestamp on a file if the user <code class="literal">smbd</code> is acting 
	on behalf has write permissions.
	Due to changes in Microsoft Office 2000 and beyond,
	the default for this parameter has been changed from "no" to "yes" in Samba 3.0.14
	and above. Microsoft Excel will display dialog box warnings about the file being
	changed by another user if this parameter is not set to "yes" and files are being
	shared between users.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dos filetimes</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ea support (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315744"></a>

ea support (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315745"></a><a name="EASUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will allow clients to attempt to store OS/2 style Extended
    attributes on a share. In order to enable this parameter the underlying filesystem exported by
    the share must support extended attributes (such as provided on XFS and EXT3 on Linux, with the
    correct kernel patches). On Linux the filesystem must have been mounted with the mount
        option user_xattr in order for extended attributes to work, also
		extended attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ea support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enable asu support (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315797"></a>

enable asu support (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315798"></a><a name="ENABLEASUSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Hosts running the "Advanced Server for Unix (ASU)" product 
    require some special accomodations such as creating a builtin [ADMIN$] 
    share that only supports IPC connections.  The has been the default
    behavior in smbd for many years.  However, certain Microsoft applications
    such as the Print Migrator tool require that the remote server support
    an [ADMIN$} file share.  Disabling this parameter allows for creating 
    an [ADMIN$] file share in smb.conf.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable asu support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enable core files (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315842"></a>

enable core files (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315843"></a><a name="ENABLECOREFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether core dumps should be written
	on internal exits. Normally set to <code class="constant">yes</code>.
	You should never need to change this.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable core files</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable core files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enable privileges (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315903"></a>

enable privileges (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315904"></a><a name="ENABLEPRIVILEGES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This deprecated parameter controls whether or not smbd will honor privileges assigned to specific SIDs via either
	 <code class="literal">net rpc rights</code> or one of the Windows user and group manager tools.  This parameter is
	enabled by default. It can be disabled to prevent members of the Domain Admins group from being able to
	assign privileges to users or groups which can then result in certain smbd operations running as root that
	would normally run under the context of the connected user.
	</p><p>
	An example of how privileges can be used is to assign the right to join clients to a Samba controlled
	domain without providing root access to the server via smbd.
	</p><p>
	Please read the extended description provided in the Samba HOWTO documentation.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable privileges</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enable spoolss (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id315961"></a>

enable spoolss (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id315962"></a><a name="ENABLESPOOLSS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Inverted synonym for <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DISABLESPOOLSS" target="_top">disable spoolss</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable spoolss</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="encrypt passwords (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316013"></a>

encrypt passwords (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316014"></a><a name="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords 
    will be negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and 
    above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords 
    unless a registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in 
    Samba see the chapter "User Database" in the Samba HOWTO Collection.
    </p><p>
    MS Windows clients that expect Microsoft encrypted passwords and that
    do not have plain text password support enabled will be able to
    connect only to a Samba server that has encrypted password support
    enabled and for which the user accounts have a valid encrypted password.
    Refer to the smbpasswd command man page for information regarding the
    creation of encrypted passwords for user accounts.
    </p><p>
    The use of plain text passwords is NOT advised as support for this feature
    is no longer maintained in Microsoft Windows products. If you want to use
    plain text passwords you must set this parameter to no.
    </p><p>In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly
    <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> must either 
    have access to a local <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a> file (see the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a> program for information on how to set up 
    and maintain this file), or set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = [server|domain|ads]</a> parameter which 
    causes <code class="literal">smbd</code> to authenticate against another 
	server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>encrypt passwords</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enhanced browsing (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316114"></a>

enhanced browsing (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316115"></a><a name="ENHANCEDBROWSING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option enables a couple of enhancements to 
	cross-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba 
	but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations.  
	</p><p>The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular
	wildcard query to a Samba WINS server for all Domain Master Browsers,
	followed by a browse synchronization with each of the returned
	DMBs. The second enhancement consists of a regular randomised browse
	synchronization with all currently known DMBs.</p><p>You may wish to disable this option if you have a problem with empty
	workgroups not disappearing from browse lists. Due to the restrictions
	of the browse protocols, these enhancements can cause a empty workgroup
	to stay around forever which can be annoying.</p><p>In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes
	cross-subnet browse propagation much more reliable.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enhanced browsing</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enumports command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316171"></a>

enumports command (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316172"></a><a name="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign
    to UNIX hosts.  Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port
    is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of
    a local port (i.e. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port
    (i.e. LPD Port Monitor, etc...).  By default, Samba has only one
    port defined--<code class="constant">"Samba Printer Port"</code>.  Under 
    Windows NT/2000, all printers must have a valid port name.  
    If you wish to have a list of ports displayed (<code class="literal">smbd
    </code> does not use a port name for anything) other than 
    the default <code class="constant">"Samba Printer Port"</code>, you 
    can define <em class="parameter"><code>enumports command</code></em> to point to
    a program which should generate a list of ports, one per line,
    to standard output.  This listing will then be used in response
    to the level 1 and 2 EnumPorts() RPC.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enumports command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enumports command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/listports</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="eventlog list (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316252"></a>

eventlog list (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316253"></a><a name="EVENTLOGLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of log names that Samba will 
    report to the Microsoft EventViewer utility.  The listed 
    eventlogs will be associated with tdb file on disk in the 
    <code class="filename">$(lockdir)/eventlog</code>.
    </p><p>
    The administrator must use an external process to parse the normal 
    Unix logs such as <code class="filename">/var/log/messages</code>
    and write then entries to the eventlog tdb files.  Refer to the
    eventlogadm(8) utility for how to write eventlog entries.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>eventlog list</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>eventlog list</code></em> = <code class="literal">Security Application Syslog Apache</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="fake directory create times (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316327"></a>

fake directory create times (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316328"></a><a name="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create 
	time for all files and directories. This is not the same as the 
	ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default 
	reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep. Setting 
	this parameter for a share causes Samba to always report midnight 
	1-1-1980 as the create time for directories.</p><p>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for 
	Visual C++ when used against Samba shares. Visual C++ generated 
	makefiles have the object directory as a dependency for each object 
	file, and a make rule to create the directory. Also, when NMAKE 
	compares timestamps it uses the creation time when examining a 
	directory. Thus the object directory will be created if it does not 
	exist, but once it does exist it will always have an earlier 
	timestamp than the object files it contains.</p><p>However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time 
	reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or 
	or deleted in the directory.  NMAKE finds all object files in 
	the object directory.  The timestamp of the last one built is then 
	compared to the timestamp of the object directory.  If the 
	directory's timestamp if newer, then all object files
	will be rebuilt.  Enabling this option 
	ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build 
	will proceed as expected.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>fake directory create times</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="fake oplocks (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316391"></a>

fake oplocks (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316392"></a><a name="FAKEOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission 
	from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants 
	an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume 
	that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively 
	cache file data. With some oplock types the client may even cache 
	file open/close operations. This can give enormous performance benefits.
	</p><p>When you set <code class="literal">fake oplocks = yes</code>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will
	always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using the file.</p><p>It is generally much better to use the real <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a> support rather 
	than this parameter.</p><p>If you enable this option on all read-only shares or 
	shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a 
	time such as physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see 
	a big performance improvement on many operations. If you enable 
	this option on shares where multiple clients may be accessing the 
	files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption. Use 
	this option carefully!</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>fake oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="follow symlinks (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316474"></a>

follow symlinks (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316475"></a><a name="FOLLOWSYMLINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter allows the Samba administrator to stop <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>	from following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this 
	parameter to <code class="constant">no</code> prevents any file or directory that is a symbolic link from being 
	followed (the user will get an 	error).  This option is very useful to stop users from adding a symbolic 
	link to <code class="filename">/etc/passwd</code> in their home directory for instance.  However 
	it will slow filename lookups down slightly.
	</p><p>
	This option is enabled (i.e. <code class="literal">smbd</code> will follow symbolic links) by default.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>follow symlinks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force create mode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316544"></a>

force create mode (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316545"></a><a name="FORCECREATEMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit
    permissions that will <span class="emphasis"><em>always</em></span> be set on a
    file created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto
    the mode bits of a file that is being created. The default for this parameter is (in octal)
    000. The modes in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto the file
    mode after the mask set in the <em class="parameter"><code>create mask</code></em>
    parameter is applied.</p><p>The example below would force all newly created files to have read and execute
    permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the
    read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force create mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">000</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force create mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">0755</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force directory mode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316620"></a>

force directory mode (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316621"></a><a name="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit 
    permissions that will <span class="emphasis"><em>always</em></span> be set on a directory 
    created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the 
    mode bits of a directory that is being created. The default for this 
    parameter is (in octal) 0000 which will not add any extra permission 
    bits to a created directory. This operation is done after the mode 
    mask in the parameter <em class="parameter"><code>directory mask</code></em> is 
    applied.</p><p>The example below would force all created directories to have read and execute
    permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the
    read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force directory mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">000</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force directory mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">0755</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force directory security mode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316695"></a>

force directory security mode (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316696"></a><a name="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating
	the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.
	</p><p>
	This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this
	mask that the user may have modified to be on.  Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" target="_top">directory security mask</a>, which works in a similar manner to this one, but uses a logical AND instead
	of an OR. 
	</p><p>
	Essentially, this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a directory, 
	to will enable (1) any flags that are off (0) but which the mask has set to on (1).
	</p><p>
	If not set explicitly this parameter is 0000, which allows a user to modify all the user/group/world
	permissions on a directory without restrictions.
	</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>
	Users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is
	primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.  Administrators of most normal systems will
	probably want to leave it set as 0000.
	</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force directory security mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force directory security mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">700</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="group"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316788"></a>

<a name="GROUP"></a>group
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316789"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#FORCEGROUP">force group</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force group (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316820"></a>

force group (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316821"></a><a name="FORCEGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be 
    assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting 
    to this service. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring 
    that all access to files on service will use the named group for 
    their permissions checking. Thus, by assigning permissions for this 
    group to the files and directories within this service the Samba 
    administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these files.</p><p>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter has extended 
    functionality in the following way. If the group name listed here 
    has a '+' character prepended to it then the current user accessing 
    the share only has the primary group default assigned to this group 
    if they are already assigned as a member of that group. This allows 
    an administrator to decide that only users who are already in a 
    particular group will create files with group ownership set to that 
    group. This gives a finer granularity of ownership assignment. For 
    example, the setting <code class="filename">force group = +sys</code> means 
    that only users who are already in group sys will have their default
    primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share. All
    other users will retain their ordinary primary group.</p><p>
	If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEUSER" target="_top">force user</a> parameter is also set the group specified in 
    <em class="parameter"><code>force group</code></em> will override the primary group
    set in <em class="parameter"><code>force user</code></em>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force group</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force group</code></em> = <code class="literal">agroup</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force printername (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id316922"></a>

force printername (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id316923"></a><a name="FORCEPRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When printing from Windows NT (or later), 
    each printer in <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> has two 
    associated names which can be used by the client.  The first
    is the sharename (or shortname) defined in smb.conf.  This
    is the only printername available for use by Windows 9x clients.
    The second name associated with a printer can be seen when 
    browsing to the "Printers" (or "Printers and Faxes") folder 
    on the Samba server.  This is referred to simply as the printername
    (not to be confused with the <em class="parameter"><code>printer name</code></em> option).
    </p><p>When assigning a new driver to a printer on a remote 
    Windows compatible print server such as Samba, the Windows client
    will rename the printer to match the driver name just uploaded.
    This can result in confusion for users when multiple 
    printers are bound to the same driver.  To prevent Samba from
    allowing the printer's printername to differ from the sharename
    defined in smb.conf, set <em class="parameter"><code>force printername = yes</code></em>.
    </p><p>Be aware that enabling this parameter may affect migrating
    printers from a Windows server to Samba since Windows has no way to 
    force the sharename and printername to match.</p><p>It is recommended that this parameter's value not be changed
    once the printer is in use by clients as this could cause a user
    not be able to delete printer connections from their local Printers 
    folder.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force printername</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force security mode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317002"></a>

force security mode (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317003"></a><a name="FORCESECURITYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating 
    the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box.
	</p><p>
	This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this
	mask that the user may have modified to be on.  Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK" target="_top">security mask</a>, which works similar like this one but uses logical AND instead of OR. 
	</p><p>
	Essentially, one bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a file,
	the user has always set to be on.
	</p><p>
	If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0, and allows a user to modify all the user/group/world
	permissions on a file, with no restrictions.
	</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>
	Note</em></span> that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this
	restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. Administrators of most
	normal systems will probably want to leave this set to 0000.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force security mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force security mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">700</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force unknown acl user (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317093"></a>

force unknown acl user (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317094"></a><a name="FORCEUNKNOWNACLUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    If this parameter is set, a Windows NT ACL that contains an unknown SID (security descriptor, or 
    representation of a user or group id) as the owner or group owner of the file will be silently
    mapped into the current UNIX uid or gid of the currently connected user.
    </p><p>
    This is designed to allow Windows NT clients to copy files and folders containing ACLs that were 
    created locally on the client machine and contain users local to that machine only (no domain
    users) to be copied to a Samba server (usually with XCOPY /O) and have the unknown userid and 
    groupid of the file owner map to the current connected user.  This can only be fixed correctly
    when winbindd allows arbitrary mapping from any Windows NT SID to a UNIX uid or gid.
    </p><p>
    Try using this parameter when XCOPY /O gives an ACCESS_DENIED error.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force unknown acl user</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force user (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317147"></a>

force user (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317148"></a><a name="FORCEUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be 
    assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service. 
    This is useful for sharing files. You should also use it carefully 
    as using it incorrectly can cause security problems.</p><p>This user name only gets used once a connection is established. 
    Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a 
    valid password. Once connected, all file operations will be performed 
    as the "forced user", no matter what username the client connected 
    as.  This can be very useful.</p><p>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter also causes the 
    primary group of the forced user to be used as the primary group 
    for all file activity. Prior to 2.0.5 the primary group was left 
    as the primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force user</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force user</code></em> = <code class="literal">auser</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="fstype (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317217"></a>

fstype (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317218"></a><a name="FSTYPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter allows the administrator to configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share 
	is using that is reported by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> 
	when a client queries the filesystem type for a share. The default type is <code class="constant">NTFS</code> for compatibility 
	with Windows NT but this can be changed to other strings such as <code class="constant">Samba</code> or <code class="constant">FAT</code> 
	if required.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>fstype</code></em> = <code class="literal">NTFS</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>fstype</code></em> = <code class="literal">Samba</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="get quota command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317296"></a>

get quota command (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317297"></a><a name="GETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">get quota command</code> should only be used 
	whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that 
	samba can use.</p><p>This option is only available you have compiled Samba with the
	<code class="literal">--with-sys-quotas</code> option or on Linux with
	<code class="literal">--with-quotas</code> and a working quota api
	was found in the system.</p><p>This parameter should specify the path to a script that 
	queries the quota information for the specified 
	user/group for the partition that 
	the specified directory is on.</p><p>Such a script should take 3 arguments:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>directory</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>type of query</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>uid of user or gid of group</p></li></ul></div><p>The type of query can be one of :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>1 - user quotas</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>2 - user default quotas (uid = -1)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>3 - group quotas</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>4 - group default quotas (gid = -1)</p></li></ul></div><p>This script should print one line as output with spaces between the arguments. The arguments are: 
	      </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 1 - quota flags (0 = no quotas, 1 = quotas enabled, 2 = quotas enabled and enforced)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 2 - number of currently used blocks</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 3 - the softlimit number of blocks</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 4 - the hardlimit number of blocks</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 5 - currently used number of inodes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 6 - the softlimit number of inodes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 7 - the hardlimit number of inodes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 8(optional) - the number of bytes in a block(default is 1024)</p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>get quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>get quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/sbin/query_quota</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="getwd cache (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317472"></a>

getwd cache (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317473"></a><a name="GETWDCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a 
    caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() 
    calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially 
    when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDESMBCONFOPTIONS" target="_top">wide smbconfoptions</a> parameter is set to <code class="constant">no</code>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>getwd cache</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="guest account (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317530"></a>

guest account (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317531"></a><a name="GUESTACCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a username which will be used for access 
    to services which are specified as <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok</a> (see below). Whatever privileges this 
    user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service. 
    This user must exist in the password file, but does not require
    a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice 
    for this parameter. 
    </p><p>On some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not 
    be able to print. Use another account in this case. You should test 
    this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the 
    <code class="literal">su -</code> command) and trying to print using the 
    system print command such as <code class="literal">lpr(1)</code> or <code class="literal">
    lp(1)</code>.</p><p>This parameter does not accept % macros, because
    many parts of the system require this value to be
	constant for correct operation.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>guest account</code></em> = <code class="literal">nobody
# default can be changed at compile-time</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>guest account</code></em> = <code class="literal">ftp</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="public"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317629"></a>

<a name="PUBLIC"></a>public
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317630"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#GUESTOK">guest ok</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="guest ok (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317660"></a>

guest ok (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317661"></a><a name="GUESTOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for 
    a service, then no password is required to connect to the service. 
    Privileges will be those of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>.</p><p>This parameter nullifies the benefits of setting
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#RESTRICTANONYMOUS" target="_top">restrict anonymous = 2</a>
	</p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> for more information about this option.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>guest ok</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="only guest"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317745"></a>

<a name="ONLYGUEST"></a>only guest
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317746"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#GUESTONLY">guest only</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="guest only (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317778"></a>

guest only (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317779"></a><a name="GUESTONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for 
    a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted. 
    This parameter will have no effect if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok</a> is not set for the service.</p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> for more information about this option.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>guest only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hide dot files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317847"></a>

hide dot files (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317848"></a><a name="HIDEDOTFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether 
	files starting with a dot appear as hidden files.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide dot files</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hide files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317888"></a>

hide files (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317889"></a><a name="HIDEFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of files or directories that are not 
	visible but are accessible.  The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied 
	to any files or directories that match.</p><p>Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', 
	which allows spaces to be included in the entry.  '*'
	and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories 
	as in DOS wildcards.</p><p>Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must 
	not include the Unix directory separator '/'.</p><p>Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable 
	in hiding files.</p><p>Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, 
	as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match 
	as they are scanned.</p><p>
	The example shown above is based on files that the Macintosh 
	SMB client (DAVE) available from <a class="ulink" href="http://www.thursby.com" target="_top"> 
	Thursby</a> creates for internal use, and also still hides 
	all files beginning with a dot.
	</p><p>
	An example of us of this parameter is:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
hide files = /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/
</pre><p>
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide files</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# no file are hidden</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hide special files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id317967"></a>

hide special files (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id317968"></a><a name="HIDESPECIALFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter prevents clients from seeing special files such as sockets, devices and
	fifo's in directory listings.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide special files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hide unreadable (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318008"></a>

hide unreadable (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318009"></a><a name="HIDEUNREADABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter prevents clients from seeing the
		existance of files that cannot be read. Defaults to off.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide unreadable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hide unwriteable files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318050"></a>

hide unwriteable files (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318051"></a><a name="HIDEUNWRITEABLEFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be written to. 
    Defaults to off. Note that unwriteable directories are shown as usual.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide unwriteable files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="homedir map (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318091"></a>

homedir map (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318092"></a><a name="HOMEDIRMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NISHOMEDIR" target="_top">nis homedir</a> is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> is also acting 	as a Win95/98 <em class="parameter"><code>logon server</code></em> 
	then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's 	home directory should be extracted.  
	At present, only the Sun auto.home map format is understood. The form of the map is:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<code class="literal">username server:/some/file/system</code>
</pre><p>
	and the program will extract the servername from before the first ':'.  There should probably be a better parsing system 
	that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another automounter) maps.
	</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>
	A working NIS client is required on the system for this option to work.
	</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>homedir map</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>homedir map</code></em> = <code class="literal">amd.homedir</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="host msdfs (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318198"></a>

host msdfs (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318199"></a><a name="HOSTMSDFS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients to browse
	Dfs trees hosted on the server.
	</p><p>
	See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT" target="_top">msdfs root</a> share  level  parameter.  For more  information  on
	setting  up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to the MSFDS chapter in the book Samba3-HOWTO.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>host msdfs</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hostname lookups (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318260"></a>

hostname lookups (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318261"></a><a name="HOSTNAMELOOKUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies whether samba should use (expensive)
    hostname lookups or use the ip addresses instead. An example place
    where hostname lookups are currently used is when checking 
    the <code class="literal">hosts deny</code> and <code class="literal">hosts allow</code>.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hostname lookups</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hostname lookups</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="allow hosts"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318331"></a>

<a name="ALLOWHOSTS"></a>allow hosts
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318332"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#HOSTSALLOW">hosts allow</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hosts allow (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318363"></a>

hosts allow (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318364"></a><a name="HOSTSALLOW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A synonym for this parameter is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ALLOWHOSTS" target="_top">allow hosts</a>.</p><p>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited 
    set of hosts which are permitted to access a service.</p><p>If specified in the [global] section then it will
    apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual 
    service has a different setting.</p><p>You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For 
    example, you could restrict access to only the hosts on a 
    Class C subnet with something like <code class="literal">allow hosts = 150.203.5.</code>.
	The full syntax of the list is described in the man 
    page <code class="filename">hosts_access(5)</code>. Note that this man
    page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will
    be given here also.</p><p>Note that the localhost address 127.0.0.1 will always 
    be allowed access unless specifically denied by a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTSDENY" target="_top">hosts deny</a> option.</p><p>You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and 
    by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups. The 
    <span class="emphasis"><em>EXCEPT</em></span> keyword can also be used to limit a 
    wildcard list. The following examples may provide some help:</p><p>Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.*; except one</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66</code></p><p>Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0</code></p><p>Example 3: allow a couple of hosts</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur</code></p><p>Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but 
    deny access from one particular host</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = @foonet</code></p><p><code class="literal">hosts deny = pirate</code></p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.</p></div><p>See <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a> for a way of testing your host access 
    to see if it does what you expect.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hosts allow</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# none (i.e., all hosts permitted access)</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hosts allow</code></em> = <code class="literal">150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="deny hosts"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318551"></a>

<a name="DENYHOSTS"></a>deny hosts
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318552"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#HOSTSDENY">hosts deny</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hosts deny (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318582"></a>

hosts deny (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318583"></a><a name="HOSTSDENY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The opposite of <em class="parameter"><code>hosts allow</code></em> 
    - hosts listed here are <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> permitted access to 
    services unless the specific services have their own lists to override 
    this one. Where the lists conflict, the <em class="parameter"><code>allow</code></em> 
	list takes precedence.</p><p>
	In the event that it is necessary to deny all by default, use the keyword
	ALL (or the netmask <code class="literal">0.0.0.0/0</code>) and then explicitly specify
	to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTSALLOW" target="_top">hosts allow = hosts allow</a> parameter those hosts
	that should be permitted access.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hosts deny</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# none (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded)</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hosts deny</code></em> = <code class="literal">150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap backend (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318680"></a>

idmap backend (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318681"></a><a name="IDMAPBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	The idmap backend provides a plugin interface for Winbind to use
	varying backends to store SID/uid/gid mapping tables.
	</p><p>
	This option specifies the default backend that is used when no special
	configuration set, but it is now deprecated in favour of the new
	spelling <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG*:BACKEND" target="_top">idmap config * :  backend</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">tdb</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318737"></a>

idmap cache time (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318738"></a><a name="IDMAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's
	idmap interface will cache positive SID/uid/gid query results.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">604800 (one week)</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap config (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id318779"></a>

idmap config (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id318780"></a><a name="IDMAPCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	ID mapping in Samba is the mapping between Windows SIDs and Unix user
	and group IDs. This is performed by Winbindd with a configurable plugin
	interface. Samba's ID mapping is configured by options starting with the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG" target="_top">idmap config</a> prefix.
	An idmap option consists of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG" target="_top">idmap config</a>
	prefix, followed by a domain name or the asterisk character (*),
	a colon, and the name of an idmap setting for the chosen domain.
	</p><p>
	The idmap configuration is hence divided into groups, one group
	for each domain to be configured, and one group with the the
	asterisk instead of a proper domain name, which speifies the
	default configuration that is used to catch all domains that do
	not have an explicit idmap configuration of their own.
	</p><p>
	There are three general options available:
	</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">backend = backend_name</span></dt><dd><p>
		This specifies the name of the idmap plugin to use as the
		SID/uid/gid backend for this domain. The standard backends are
		tdb
		(<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a>),
		tdb2
		(<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb2.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb2</span>(8)</span></a>),
		ldap
		(<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ldap.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ldap</span>(8)</span></a>),
		,
		rid
		(<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_rid.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_rid</span>(8)</span></a>),
		,
		hash
		(<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_hash.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_hash</span>(8)</span></a>),
		,
		autorid
		(<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_autorid.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_autorid</span>(8)</span></a>),
		,
		ad
		(<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a>),
		,
		adex
		(<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_adex.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_adex</span>(8)</span></a>),
		,
		and nss.
		(<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_nss.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_nss</span>(8)</span></a>),
		The corresponding manual pages contain the details, but
		here is a summary.
		</p><p>
		The first three of these create mappings of their own using
		internal unixid counters and store the mappings in a database.
		These are suitable for use in the default idmap configuration.
		The rid and hash backends use a pure algorithmic calculation
		to determine the unixid for a SID. The autorid module is a
		mixture of the tdb and rid backend. It creates ranges for
		each domain encountered and then uses the rid algorithm for each
		of these automatically configured domains individually.
		The ad and adex
		backends both use unix IDs stored in Active Directory via
		the standard schema extensions. The nss backend reverses
		the standard winbindd setup and gets the unixids via names
		from nsswitch which can be useful in an ldap setup.
		</p></dd><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p>
		Defines the available matching uid and gid range for which the
		backend is authoritative. For allocating backends, this also
		defines the start and the end of the range for allocating
		new unid IDs.
		</p><p>
		winbind uses this parameter to find the backend that is
		authoritative for a unix ID to SID mapping, so it must be set
		for each individually configured domain and for the default
		configuration. The configured ranges must be mutually disjoint.
		</p></dd><dt><span class="term">read only = yes|no</span></dt><dd><p>
		This option can be used to turn the writing backends
		tdb, tdb2, and ldap into read only mode. This can be useful
		e.g. in cases where a pre-filled database exists that should
		not be extended automatically.
		</p></dd></dl></div><p>
	The following example illustrates how to configure the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a> backend for the CORP domain and the
	<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a> backend for all other
	domains. This configuration assumes that the admin of CORP assigns
	unix ids below 1000000 via the SFU extensions, and winbind is supposed
	to use the next million entries for its own mappings from trusted
	domains and for local groups for example.
	</p><pre class="programlisting">
	idmap config * : backend = tdb
	idmap config * : range = 1000000-1999999

	idmap config CORP : backend  = ad
	idmap config CORP : range = 1000-999999
	</pre><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind gid"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319002"></a>

<a name="WINBINDGID"></a>winbind gid
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319003"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPGID">idmap gid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap gid (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319034"></a>

idmap gid (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319036"></a><a name="IDMAPGID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids
	for the default idmap configuration. It is now deprecated
	in favour of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG*:RANGE" target="_top">idmap config * : range</a>.
	</p><p>See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG" target="_top">idmap config</a> option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap gid</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap gid</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000-20000</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap negative cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319118"></a>

idmap negative cache time (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319120"></a><a name="IDMAPNEGATIVECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's
	idmap interface will cache negative SID/uid/gid query results.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap negative cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">120</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind uid"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319161"></a>

<a name="WINBINDUID"></a>winbind uid
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319162"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPUID">idmap uid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap uid (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319193"></a>

idmap uid (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319194"></a><a name="IDMAPUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	The idmap uid parameter specifies the range of user ids for
	the default idmap configuration. It is now deprecated in favour
	of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG*:RANGE" target="_top">idmap config * : range</a>.
	</p><p>See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG" target="_top">idmap config</a> option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap uid</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap uid</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000-20000</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="include (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319274"></a>

include (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319276"></a><a name="INCLUDE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This allows you to include one config file inside another.  The file is included literally, as though typed 
	in place.
	</p><p>
	It takes the standard substitutions, except <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em>, 
	<em class="parameter"><code>%P</code></em> and <em class="parameter"><code>%S</code></em>.
	</p><p>
	The parameter <em class="parameter"><code>include = registry</code></em> has
	a special meaning: It does <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> include
	a file named <span class="emphasis"><em>registry</em></span> from the current working
	directory, but instead reads the global configuration options
	from the registry. See the section on registry-based
	configuration for details. Note that this option
	automatically activates registry shares.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>include</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>include</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="inherit acls (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319371"></a>

inherit acls (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319372"></a><a name="INHERITACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls
    exist on parent directories, they are always honored when creating a
    new file or subdirectory in these parent directories. The default 
    behavior is to use the unix mode specified when creating the directory. 
    Enabling this option sets the unix mode to 0777, thus guaranteeing that 
    default directory acls are propagated.

    Note that using the VFS modules acl_xattr or acl_tdb which store native
    Windows as meta-data will automatically turn this option on for any
    share for which they are loaded, as they require this option to emulate
    Windows ACLs correctly.
</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit acls</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="inherit owner (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319417"></a>

inherit owner (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319418"></a><a name="INHERITOWNER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The ownership of new files and directories 
	is normally governed by effective uid of the connected user.
	This option allows the Samba administrator to specify that
	the ownership for new files and directories should be controlled
	by the ownership of the parent directory.</p><p>Common scenarios where this behavior is useful is in 
	implementing drop-boxes where users can create and edit files but not 
	delete them and to ensure that newly create files in a user's
	roaming profile directory are actually owner by the user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit owner</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="inherit permissions (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319465"></a>

inherit permissions (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319466"></a><a name="INHERITPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a>,
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK" target="_top">directory mask</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE" target="_top">force create mode</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" target="_top">force directory mode</a> but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this.
	</p><p>New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory,
    including bits such as setgid.</p><p>
	New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent directory.  Their execute bits continue to be
	determined by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPARCHIVE" target="_top">map archive</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN" target="_top">map hidden</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPSYSTEM" target="_top">map system</a> as usual.
	</p><p>Note that the setuid bit is <span class="emphasis"><em>never</em></span> set via 
    inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this).</p><p>This can be particularly useful on large systems with 
    many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] 
    share to be used flexibly by each user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit permissions</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="init logon delayed hosts (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319603"></a>

init logon delayed hosts (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319604"></a><a name="INITLOGONDELAYEDHOSTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter takes a list of host names, addresses or networks for
	which the initial samlogon reply should be delayed (so other DCs get
	preferred by XP workstations if there are any).
	</p><p>
	The length of the delay can be specified with the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INITLOGONDELAY" target="_top">init logon delay</a> parameter.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delayed hosts</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delayed hosts</code></em> = <code class="literal">150.203.5. myhost.mynet.de</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="init logon delay (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319677"></a>

init logon delay (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319678"></a><a name="INITLOGONDELAY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter specifies a delay in milliseconds for the hosts configured
	for delayed initial samlogon with
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INITLOGONDELAYEDHOSTS" target="_top">init logon delayed hosts</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delay</code></em> = <code class="literal">100</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="interfaces (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319729"></a>

interfaces (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319730"></a><a name="INTERFACES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to override the default 
	network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name 
	registration and other NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NBT) traffic. By default Samba will query
	the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any 
	interfaces except 127.0.0.1 that are broadcast capable.</p><p>The option takes a list of interface strings. Each string 
	can be in any of the following forms:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>a network interface name (such as eth0). 
		This may include shell-like wildcards so eth* will match 
		any interface starting with the substring "eth"</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>an IP address. In this case the netmask is 
		determined from the list of interfaces obtained from the 
		kernel</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>an IP/mask pair. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>a broadcast/mask pair.</p></li></ul></div><p>The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such 
	as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted 
	decimal form.</p><p>The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted 
	decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via 
	the OS's normal hostname resolution mechanisms.</p><p>
	By default Samba enables all active interfaces that are broadcast capable
	except the loopback adaptor (IP address 127.0.0.1).
	</p><p>
	The example below configures three network interfaces corresponding 
	to the eth0 device and IP addresses 192.168.2.10 and 192.168.3.10. 
	The netmasks of the latter two interfaces would be set to 255.255.255.0.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>interfaces</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>interfaces</code></em> = <code class="literal">eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="invalid users (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319835"></a>

invalid users (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319836"></a><a name="INVALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users that should not be allowed 
    to login to this service. This is really a <span class="emphasis"><em>paranoid</em></span> 
    check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach 
    your security.</p><p>A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS 
    netgroup first (if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX 
    group if the name was not found in the NIS netgroup database.</p><p>A name starting with '+' is interpreted only 
    by looking in the UNIX group database via the NSS getgrnam() interface. A name starting with 
    '&amp;' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database 
    (this requires NIS to be working on your system). The characters 
    '+' and '&amp;' may be used at the start of the name in either order 
    so the value <em class="parameter"><code>+&amp;group</code></em> means check the 
    UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and 
    the value <em class="parameter"><code>&amp;+group</code></em> means check the NIS
    netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the 
    same as the '@' prefix).</p><p>The current servicename is substituted for <em class="parameter"><code>%S</code></em>. 
		This is useful in the [homes] section.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>invalid users</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# no invalid users</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>invalid users</code></em> = <code class="literal">root fred admin @wheel</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="iprint server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id319936"></a>

iprint server (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id319937"></a><a name="IPRINTSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">iprint</code>.
    </p><p>
   If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS <code class="filename">client.conf</code>. This is 
   necessary if you have virtual samba servers that connect to different CUPS daemons.
   </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>iprint server</code></em> = <code class="literal">""</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>iprint server</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYCUPSSERVER</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="keepalive (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320018"></a>

keepalive (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320019"></a><a name="KEEPALIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents 
    the number of seconds between <em class="parameter"><code>keepalive</code></em> 
    packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be 
    sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether 
    a client is still present and responding.</p><p>Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket 
    has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it by default. (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SOCKETOPTIONS" target="_top">socket options</a>). 
Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>keepalive</code></em> = <code class="literal">300</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>keepalive</code></em> = <code class="literal">600</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="kerberos method (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320100"></a>

kerberos method (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320101"></a><a name="KERBEROSMETHOD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Controls how kerberos tickets are verified.
	</p><p>Valid options are:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>secrets only - use only the secrets.tdb for
	  ticket verification (default)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>system keytab - use only the system keytab
	  for ticket verification</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>dedicated keytab - use a dedicated keytab
	  for ticket verification</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>secrets and keytab - use the secrets.tdb
	  first, then the system keytab</p></li></ul></div><p>
	  The major difference between "system keytab" and "dedicated
	  keytab" is that the latter method relies on kerberos to find the
	  correct keytab entry instead of filtering based on expected
	  principals.
	</p><p>
	  When the kerberos method is in "dedicated keytab" mode,
	  <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEDICATEDKEYTABFILE" target="_top">dedicated keytab file</a> must be set to
	  specify the location of the keytab file.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>kerberos method</code></em> = <code class="literal">secrets only</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="kernel change notify (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320189"></a>

kernel change notify (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320190"></a><a name="KERNELCHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the 
	kernel for change notifications in directories so that
	SMB clients can refresh whenever the data on the server changes.
	</p><p>This parameter is only used when your kernel supports 
	change notification to user programs using the inotify interface.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>kernel change notify</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="kernel oplocks (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320235"></a>

kernel oplocks (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320236"></a><a name="KERNELOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>For UNIXes that support kernel based <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a>
	(currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter 
	allows the use of them to be turned on or off.</p><p>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <em class="parameter"><code>oplocks
	</code></em> to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation 
	accesses a file that <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> has oplocked. This allows complete 
	data consistency between SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is 
	a <span class="emphasis"><em>very</em></span> cool feature :-).</p><p>This parameter defaults to <code class="constant">on</code>, but is translated
	to a no-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support.
	You should never need to touch this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>kernel oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lanman auth (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320317"></a>

lanman auth (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320318"></a><a name="LANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to
    authenticate users or permit password changes
    using the LANMAN password hash. If disabled, only clients which support NT 
    password hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000 clients, smbclient, but not 
    Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS network client) will be able to
    connect to the Samba host.</p><p>The LANMAN encrypted response is easily broken, due to its
    case-insensitive nature, and the choice of algorithm.  Servers
    without Windows 95/98/ME or MS DOS clients are advised to disable
    this option.  </p><p>When this parameter is set to <code class="literal">no</code> this
    will also result in sambaLMPassword in Samba's passdb being
    blanked after the next password change. As a result of that
    lanman clients won't be able to authenticate, even if lanman
    auth is reenabled later on.
    </p><p>Unlike the <code class="literal">encrypt
    passwords</code> option, this parameter cannot alter client
    behaviour, and the LANMAN response will still be sent over the
    network.  See the <code class="literal">client lanman
    auth</code> to disable this for Samba's clients (such as smbclient)</p><p>If this option, and <code class="literal">ntlm
    auth</code> are both disabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be
    permited.  Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require
    special configuration to use it.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lanman auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="large readwrite (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320412"></a>

large readwrite (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320413"></a><a name="LARGEREADWRITE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not
    <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> supports the new 64k
    streaming read and write variant SMB requests introduced with
    Windows 2000. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs
    this requires Samba to be running on a 64-bit capable operating
    system such as IRIX, Solaris or a Linux 2.4 kernel. Can improve
    performance by 10% with Windows 2000 clients. Defaults to on. Not as
	tested as some other Samba code paths.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>large readwrite</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap admin dn (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320464"></a>

ldap admin dn (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320465"></a><a name="LDAPADMINDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a> defines the Distinguished  Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact
	the ldap server when retreiving  user account information. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a> is used
	in conjunction with the admin dn password stored in the <code class="filename">private/secrets.tdb</code>
	file.  See the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>
	man page for more information on how  to accomplish this.
	</p><p>
	The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a> requires a fully specified DN. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap  suffix</a> is not appended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a>.
	</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap connection timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320566"></a>

ldap connection timeout (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320567"></a><a name="LDAPCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter tells the LDAP library calls which timeout in seconds
	they should honor during initial connection establishments to LDAP servers.
	It is very useful in failover scenarios in particular. If one or more LDAP
	servers are not reachable at all, we do not have to wait until TCP
	timeouts are over. This feature must be supported by your LDAP library.
	</p><p>
	This parameter is different from <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPTIMEOUT" target="_top">ldap timeout</a>
	which affects operations on LDAP servers using an existing connection
	and not establishing an initial connection.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap connection timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap debug level (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320625"></a>

ldap debug level (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320626"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
		This parameter controls the debug level of the LDAP library
		calls. In the case of OpenLDAP, it is the same
		bit-field as understood by the server and documented in the
		 <a class="citerefentry" href="slapd.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">slapd.conf</span>(5)</span></a>
		manpage.
		A typical useful value will be
		 <span class="emphasis"><em>1</em></span> for tracing function calls.
	</p><p>
		The debug ouput from the LDAP libraries appears with the
		prefix [LDAP] in Samba's logging output.
		The level at which LDAP logging is printed is controlled by the
		parameter <em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug threshold</code></em>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug level</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug level</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap debug threshold (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320708"></a>

ldap debug threshold (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320710"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGTHRESHOLD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
		This parameter controls the Samba debug level at which
		the ldap library debug output is
		printed in the Samba logs. See the description of
		 <em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug level</code></em> for details.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug threshold</code></em> = <code class="literal">10</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug threshold</code></em> = <code class="literal">5</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap delete dn (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320773"></a>

ldap delete dn (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320774"></a><a name="LDAPDELETEDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies whether a delete
	operation in the ldapsam deletes the complete entry or only the attributes
	specific to Samba.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap delete dn</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap deref (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320815"></a>

ldap deref (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320816"></a><a name="LDAPDEREF"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls whether Samba should tell the LDAP library
	to use a certain alias dereferencing method. The default is
	<span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, which means that the default setting of the
	ldap client library will be kept. Other possible values are
	<span class="emphasis"><em>never</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>finding</em></span>,
	<span class="emphasis"><em>searching</em></span> and <span class="emphasis"><em>always</em></span>. Grab
	your LDAP manual for more information.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap deref</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap deref</code></em> = <code class="literal">searching</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap follow referral (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320893"></a>

ldap follow referral (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320894"></a><a name="LDAPFOLLOWREFERRAL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls whether to follow LDAP referrals or not when
	searching for entries in the LDAP database. Possible values are
	<span class="emphasis"><em>on</em></span> to enable following referrals,
	<span class="emphasis"><em>off</em></span> to disable this, and
	<span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, to use the libldap default settings.
	libldap's choice of following referrals or not is set in
	/etc/openldap/ldap.conf with the REFERRALS parameter as documented in
	ldap.conf(5).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap follow referral</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap follow referral</code></em> = <code class="literal">off</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap group suffix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id320964"></a>

ldap group suffix (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id320965"></a><a name="LDAPGROUPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the suffix that is 
	used for groups when these are added to the LDAP directory.
	If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead.  The suffix string is pre-pended to the
        <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap group suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap group suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Groups</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap idmap suffix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321044"></a>

ldap idmap suffix (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321045"></a><a name="LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameters specifies the suffix that is used when storing idmap mappings. If this parameter 
	is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead.  The suffix 
	string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap idmap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap idmap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Idmap</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap machine suffix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321123"></a>

ldap machine suffix (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321124"></a><a name="LDAPMACHINESUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	It specifies where machines should be added to the ldap tree.  If this parameter is unset, the value of
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead.  The suffix string is pre-pended to the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap machine suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap machine suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Computers</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap page size (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321202"></a>

ldap page size (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321203"></a><a name="LDAPPAGESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter specifies the number of entries per page.
	</p><p>If the LDAP server supports paged results, clients can
	request	subsets of search results (pages) instead of the entire list.
	This parameter specifies the size of these pages.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap page size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1024</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap page size</code></em> = <code class="literal">512</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap passwd sync (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321265"></a>

ldap passwd sync (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321266"></a><a name="LDAPPASSWDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This option is used to define whether or not Samba should sync the LDAP password with the NT
	and LM hashes for normal accounts (NOT for workstation, server or domain trusts) on a password
	change via SAMBA.  
	</p><p>
	The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPPASSWDSYNC" target="_top">ldap passwd sync</a> can be set to one of three values: 
	</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>Yes</code></em>  =  Try 
			to update the LDAP, NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>No</code></em> = Update NT and 
			LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>Only</code></em> = Only update 
			the LDAP password and let the LDAP server do the rest.</p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap passwd sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap replication sleep (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321360"></a>

ldap replication sleep (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321361"></a><a name="LDAPREPLICATIONSLEEP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	When Samba is asked to write to a read-only LDAP replica, we are redirected to talk to the read-write master server.
	This server then replicates our changes back to the 'local' server, however the replication might take some seconds, 
	especially over slow links.  Certain client activities, particularly domain joins, can become confused by the 'success' 
	that does not immediately change the LDAP back-end's data.
	</p><p>
	This option simply causes Samba to wait a short time, to allow the LDAP server to catch up.  If you have a particularly
	high-latency network, you may wish to time the LDAP replication with a network sniffer, and increase this value accordingly.  
	Be aware that no checking is performed that the data has actually replicated.
	</p><p>
	The value is specified in milliseconds, the maximum value is 5000 (5 seconds).
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap replication sleep</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldapsam:editposix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321416"></a>

ldapsam:editposix (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321417"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:EDITPOSIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Editposix is an option that leverages ldapsam:trusted to make it simpler to manage a domain controller
	eliminating the need to set up custom scripts to add and manage the posix users and groups. This option
	will instead directly manipulate the ldap tree to create, remove and modify user and group entries.
	This option also requires a running winbindd as it is used to allocate new uids/gids on user/group
	creation. The allocation range must be therefore configured.
	</p><p>
	To use this option, a basic ldap tree must be provided and the ldap suffix parameters must be properly
	configured. On virgin servers the default users and groups (Administrator, Guest, Domain Users,
	Domain Admins, Domain Guests) can be precreated with the command <code class="literal">net sam
	provision</code>. To run this command the ldap server must be running, Winindd must be running and
	the smb.conf ldap options must be properly configured.

	The typical ldap setup used with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:TRUSTED" target="_top">ldapsam:trusted = yes</a> option
	is usually sufficient to use <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:EDITPOSIX" target="_top">ldapsam:editposix = yes</a> as well.
	</p><p>
	An example configuration can be the following:

	</p><pre class="programlisting">
	encrypt passwords = true
	passdb backend = ldapsam

	ldapsam:trusted=yes
	ldapsam:editposix=yes

	ldap admin dn = cn=admin,dc=samba,dc=org
	ldap delete dn = yes
	ldap group suffix = ou=groups
	ldap idmap suffix = ou=idmap
	ldap machine suffix = ou=computers
	ldap user suffix = ou=users
	ldap suffix = dc=samba,dc=org

	idmap backend = ldap:"ldap://localhost"

	idmap uid = 5000-50000
	idmap gid = 5000-50000
	</pre><p>

	This configuration assumes a directory layout like described in the following ldif:

	</p><pre class="programlisting">
	dn: dc=samba,dc=org
	objectClass: top
	objectClass: dcObject
	objectClass: organization
	o: samba.org
	dc: samba

	dn: cn=admin,dc=samba,dc=org
	objectClass: simpleSecurityObject
	objectClass: organizationalRole
	cn: admin
	description: LDAP administrator
	userPassword: secret

	dn: ou=users,dc=samba,dc=org
	objectClass: top
	objectClass: organizationalUnit
	ou: users

	dn: ou=groups,dc=samba,dc=org
	objectClass: top
	objectClass: organizationalUnit
	ou: groups

	dn: ou=idmap,dc=samba,dc=org
	objectClass: top
	objectClass: organizationalUnit
	ou: idmap

	dn: ou=computers,dc=samba,dc=org
	objectClass: top
	objectClass: organizationalUnit
	ou: computers
	</pre><p>
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldapsam:editposix</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldapsam:trusted (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321521"></a>

ldapsam:trusted (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321522"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:TRUSTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	By default, Samba as a Domain Controller with an LDAP backend needs to use the Unix-style NSS subsystem to
	access user and group information. Due to the way Unix stores user information in /etc/passwd and /etc/group
	this inevitably leads to inefficiencies. One important question a user needs to know is the list of groups he
	is member of. The plain UNIX model involves a complete enumeration of the file /etc/group and its NSS
	counterparts in LDAP. UNIX has optimized functions to enumerate group membership. Sadly, other functions that
	are used to deal with user and group attributes lack such optimization.
	</p><p>
	To make Samba scale well in large environments, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:TRUSTED" target="_top">ldapsam:trusted = yes</a>
	option assumes that the complete user and group database that is relevant to Samba is stored in LDAP with the
	standard posixAccount/posixGroup attributes. It further assumes that the Samba auxiliary object classes are 
	stored together with the POSIX data in the same LDAP object. If these assumptions are met, 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:TRUSTED" target="_top">ldapsam:trusted = yes</a> can be activated and Samba can bypass the 
	NSS system to query user group memberships. Optimized LDAP queries can greatly speed up domain logon and 
	administration tasks. Depending on the size of the LDAP database a factor of 100 or more for common queries 
	is easily achieved.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldapsam:trusted</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap ssl ads (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321595"></a>

ldap ssl ads (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321596"></a><a name="LDAPSSLADS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should
	use SSL when connecting to the ldap server using
	<span class="emphasis"><em>ads</em></span> methods.
	Rpc methods are not affected by this parameter. Please note, that
	this parameter won't have any effect if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL" target="_top">ldap ssl</a>
	is set to <em class="parameter"><code>no</code></em>.
	</p><p>See <span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)
	for more information on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL" target="_top">ldap ssl</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap ssl ads</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap ssl (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321677"></a>

ldap ssl (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321678"></a><a name="LDAPSSL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should
	use SSL when connecting to the ldap server
	This is <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> related to
	Samba's previous SSL support which was enabled by specifying the
	<code class="literal">--with-ssl</code> option to the
	<code class="filename">configure</code>
	script.</p><p>LDAP connections should be secured where possible. This may be
	done setting <span class="emphasis"><em>either</em></span> this parameter to
	<em class="parameter"><code>Start_tls</code></em>
	<span class="emphasis"><em>or</em></span> by specifying <em class="parameter"><code>ldaps://</code></em> in
        the URL argument of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSDBBACKEND" target="_top">passdb backend</a>.</p><p>The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL" target="_top">ldap ssl</a> can be set to one of
	two values:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>Off</code></em> = Never
			use SSL when querying the directory.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>start tls</code></em> = Use
			the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for
			communicating with the directory server.</p></li></ul></div><p>
	Please note that this parameter does only affect <span class="emphasis"><em>rpc</em></span>
	methods. To enable the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for
	<span class="emphasis"><em>ads</em></span>, set
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL" target="_top">ldap ssl = yes</a>
	<span class="emphasis"><em>and</em></span>
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSLADS" target="_top">ldap ssl ads = yes</a>.
	See <span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)
	for more information on	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSLADS" target="_top">ldap ssl ads</a>.
        </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap ssl</code></em> = <code class="literal">start tls</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap suffix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321862"></a>

ldap suffix (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321863"></a><a name="LDAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the base for all ldap suffixes and for storing the sambaDomain object.</p><p>
	The ldap suffix will be appended to the values specified for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPUSERSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap user suffix</a>,
	 <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPGROUPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap group suffix</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPMACHINESUFFIX" target="_top">ldap machine suffix</a>, and the
	 <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap idmap suffix</a>. Each of these should be given only a DN relative to the
	 <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">dc=samba,dc=org</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id321978"></a>

ldap timeout (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id321979"></a><a name="LDAPTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter defines the number of seconds that Samba should use as timeout for LDAP operations.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">15</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap user suffix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322018"></a>

ldap user suffix (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322019"></a><a name="LDAPUSERSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter specifies where users are added to the tree. If this parameter is unset, 
	the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead.  The suffix 
	string is pre-pended to the  <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap user suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap user suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=people</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="level2 oplocks (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322097"></a>

level2 oplocks (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322098"></a><a name="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether Samba supports
	level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share.</p><p>Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients 
	that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock 
	to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead 
	of releasing all oplocks on a second open, as in traditional, 
	exclusive oplocks). This allows all openers of the file that 
	support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read-ahead only (ie. 
	they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases performance 
	for many accesses of files that are not commonly written (such as 
	application .EXE files).</p><p>Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock 
	writes to the file all clients are notified (no reply is needed 
	or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and 
	delete any read-ahead caches.</p><p>It is recommended that this parameter be turned on to
	speed access to shared executables.</p><p>For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec.</p><p>
	Currently, if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#KERNELOPLOCKS" target="_top">kernel oplocks</a> are supported then
	level2 oplocks are not granted (even if this parameter is set to
	<code class="constant">yes</code>).  Note also, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a>
	parameter must be set to <code class="constant">yes</code> on this share in order for 
	this parameter to have any effect.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>level2 oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lm announce (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322192"></a>

lm announce (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322193"></a><a name="LMANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will produce Lanman announce 
	broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see 
	the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have three 
	values, <code class="constant">yes</code>, <code class="constant">no</code>, or
	<code class="constant">auto</code>. The default is <code class="constant">auto</code>.  
	If set to <code class="constant">no</code> Samba will never produce these 
	broadcasts. If set to <code class="constant">yes</code> Samba will produce 
	Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMINTERVAL" target="_top">lm interval</a>. If set to <code class="constant">auto</code> 
	Samba will not send Lanman announce broadcasts by default but will 
	listen for them. If it hears such a broadcast on the wire it will 
	then start sending them at a frequency set by the parameter 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMINTERVAL" target="_top">lm interval</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm announce</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm announce</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lm interval (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322307"></a>

lm interval (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322308"></a><a name="LMINTERVAL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce 
	broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the 
		<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMANNOUNCE" target="_top">lm announce</a> parameter) then this 
	parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be 
	made.  If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be 
	made despite the setting of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMANNOUNCE" target="_top">lm announce</a> 
	parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm interval</code></em> = <code class="literal">60</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm interval</code></em> = <code class="literal">120</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="load printers (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322388"></a>

load printers (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322390"></a><a name="LOADPRINTERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A boolean variable that controls whether all 
    printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default. 
    See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERS" target="_top">printers</a> section for 
    more details.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>load printers</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="local master (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322442"></a>

local master (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322443"></a><a name="LOCALMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to try and become a local master browser 
	on a subnet. If set to <code class="constant">no</code> then <code class="literal">
	nmbd</code> will not attempt to become a local master browser 
	on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By
	default this value is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>. Setting this value to 
	<code class="constant">yes</code> doesn't mean that Samba will <span class="emphasis"><em>become</em></span> the 
	local master browser on a subnet, just that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> 
	will <span class="emphasis"><em>participate</em></span> in elections for local master browser.</p><p>Setting this value to <code class="constant">no</code> will cause <code class="literal">nmbd</code> <span class="emphasis"><em>never</em></span> to become a local 
master browser.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>local master</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lock dir"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322539"></a>

<a name="LOCKDIR"></a>lock dir
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322540"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOCKDIRECTORY">lock directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lock directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322570"></a>

lock directory (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322571"></a><a name="LOCKDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the directory where lock 
	files will be placed.  The lock files are used to implement the 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXCONNECTIONS" target="_top">max connections</a> option.
	</p><p>
		Note: This option can not be set inside registry
		configurations.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/var/locks</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/samba/locks</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="locking (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322644"></a>

locking (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322645"></a><a name="LOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether or not locking will be 
	performed by the server in response to lock requests from the 
	client.</p><p>If <code class="literal">locking = no</code>, all lock and unlock 
	requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report 
	that the file in question is available for locking.</p><p>If <code class="literal">locking = yes</code>, real locking will be performed 
	by the server.</p><p>This option <span class="emphasis"><em>may</em></span> be useful for read-only 
	filesystems which <span class="emphasis"><em>may</em></span> not need locking (such as 
	CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of <code class="constant">no</code> 
	is not really recommended even in this case.</p><p>Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a 
	specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption. 
	You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lock spin count (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322713"></a>

lock spin count (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322714"></a><a name="LOCKSPINCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter has been made inoperative in Samba 3.0.24.
	The functionality it contolled is now controlled by the parameter
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKSPINTIME" target="_top">lock spin time</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock spin count</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lock spin time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322766"></a>

lock spin time (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322767"></a><a name="LOCKSPINTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The time in milliseconds that smbd should 
	keep waiting to see if a failed lock request can
	be granted. This parameter has changed in default
	value from Samba 3.0.23 from 10 to 200. The associated
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKSPINCOUNT" target="_top">lock spin count</a> parameter is
	no longer used in Samba 3.0.24. You should not need
	to change the value of this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock spin time</code></em> = <code class="literal">200</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="log file (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322820"></a>

log file (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322821"></a><a name="LOGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This option allows you to override the name of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file).
    </p><p>
    This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate log files for each user or machine.
    </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log file</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/var/log.%m</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debuglevel"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322870"></a>

<a name="DEBUGLEVEL"></a>debuglevel
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322872"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOGLEVEL">log level</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="log level (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id322901"></a>

log level (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id322902"></a><a name="LOGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    The value of the parameter (a astring) allows the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the 
    <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file. 
    </p><p>This parameter has been extended since the 2.2.x 
    series, now it allows to specify the debug level for multiple 
    debug classes. This is to give greater flexibility in the configuration 
    of the system. The following debug classes are currently implemented:
    </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>all</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>tdb</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>printdrivers</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>lanman</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>smb</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>rpc_parse</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>rpc_srv</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>rpc_cli</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>passdb</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>sam</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>auth</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>winbind</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>vfs</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>idmap</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>quota</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>acls</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>locking</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>dmapi</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>registry</code></em></p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log level</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log level</code></em> = <code class="literal">3 passdb:5 auth:10 winbind:2</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="logon drive (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id323130"></a>

logon drive (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id323131"></a><a name="LOGONDRIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory will be
	connected (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME" target="_top">logon home</a>) and is only used by NT
	Workstations.
	</p><p>
	Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon drive</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon drive</code></em> = <code class="literal">h:</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="logon home (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id323203"></a>

logon home (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id323204"></a><a name="LOGONHOME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter specifies the home directory location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC.  
	It allows you to do
	</p><p>
	<code class="prompt">C:\&gt;</code><strong class="userinput"><code>NET USE H: /HOME</code></strong>
	</p><p>
	from a command prompt, for example.
	</p><p>
	This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
	</p><p>
	This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure that roaming profiles are stored in a 
	subdirectory of the user's 	home directory.  This is done in the following way:
	</p><p>
	<code class="literal">logon home = \\%N\%U\profile</code>
	</p><p>
	This tells Samba to return the above string, with substitutions made when a client requests the info, generally 
	in a NetUserGetInfo request.  Win9X clients truncate the info to \\server\share when a user does 
  	 <code class="literal">net use /home</code> but use the whole string when dealing with profiles.
	</p><p>
	Note that in prior versions of Samba, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONPATH" target="_top">logon path</a> was returned rather than 
	<em class="parameter"><code>logon home</code></em>.  This broke <code class="literal">net use /home</code> 
	but allowed profiles outside the home directory. The current implementation is correct, and can be used for 
	profiles if you use the above trick.
	</p><p>
	Disable this feature by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME" target="_top">logon home = ""</a> - using the empty string.
	</p><p>
	This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon home</code></em> = <code class="literal">\\%N\%U</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon home</code></em> = <code class="literal">\\remote_smb_server\%U</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="logon path (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id323356"></a>

logon path (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id323357"></a><a name="LOGONPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter specifies the directory where roaming profiles (Desktop, NTuser.dat, etc) are 
	stored.  Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has nothing to do with Win 9X roaming
	profiles.  To find out how to handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME" target="_top">logon home</a> parameter.
	</p><p>
	This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or
	machine.  It also specifies the directory from which the "Application Data", <code class="filename">desktop</code>, <code class="filename">start menu</code>, <code class="filename">network neighborhood</code>, <code class="filename">programs</code> and other
	folders, and their contents, are loaded and displayed on your Windows NT client.
	</p><p>
	The share and the path must be readable by the user for the preferences and directories to be loaded onto the
	Windows NT client. The share must be writeable when the user logs in for the first time, in order that the
	Windows NT client can create the NTuser.dat and other directories.  
	Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can, if required, be made read-only.  It is not advisable
	that the NTuser.dat file be made read-only - rename it to NTuser.man to achieve the desired effect (a
	<span class="emphasis"><em>MAN</em></span>datory profile).
	</p><p>
	Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to the [homes] share, even though there is no user logged
	in.  Therefore, it is vital that the logon path does not include a reference to the homes share (i.e. setting
	this parameter to \\%N\homes\profile_path will cause problems).
	</p><p>
	This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
	</p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>
	Do not quote the value. Setting this as <span class="quote">&#8220;<span class="quote">\\%N\profile\%U</span>&#8221;</span>
	will break profile handling. Where the tdbsam or ldapsam passdb backend
	is used, at the time the user account is created the value configured
	for this parameter is written to the passdb backend and that value will
	over-ride the parameter value present in the smb.conf file. Any error
	present in the passdb backend account record must be editted using the
	appropriate tool (pdbedit on the command-line, or any other locally
	provided system tool).
	</p></div><p>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a domain controller.</p><p>
	Disable the use of roaming profiles by setting the value of this parameter to the empty string. For
	example, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONPATH" target="_top">logon path = ""</a>. Take note that even if the default setting
	in the smb.conf file is the empty string, any value specified in the user account settings in the passdb
	backend will over-ride the effect of setting this parameter to null. Disabling of all roaming profile use
	requires that the user account settings must also be blank.
	</p><p>
	An example of use is:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U
</pre><p>
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon path</code></em> = <code class="literal">\\%N\%U\profile</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="logon script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id323503"></a>

logon script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id323504"></a><a name="LOGONSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter specifies the batch file (<code class="filename">.bat</code>) or NT command file
	(<code class="filename">.cmd</code>) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully logs in.  The file
	must contain the DOS style CR/LF line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is recommended.
	</p><p>
	The script must be a relative path to the <em class="parameter"><code>[netlogon]</code></em> service.  If the [netlogon]
	service specifies a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path</a> of <code class="filename">/usr/local/samba/netlogon</code>, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONSCRIPT" target="_top">logon  script = STARTUP.BAT</a>, then the file that will be downloaded is:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
	/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT
</pre><p>
	</p><p>
	The contents of the batch file are entirely your choice.  A suggested command would be to add <code class="literal">NET TIME \\SERVER /SET /YES</code>, to force every machine to synchronize clocks with the
	same time server.  Another use would be to add <code class="literal">NET USE U: \\SERVER\UTILS</code>
	for commonly used utilities, or 
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<strong class="userinput"><code>NET USE Q: \\SERVER\ISO9001_QA</code></strong>
</pre><p> 
	for example.
	</p><p>
	Note that it is particularly important not to allow write access to the [netlogon] share, or to grant users
	write permission on the batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow the batch files to be
	arbitrarily modified and security to be breached.	
	</p><p>
	This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or
	machine.
	</p><p>
	This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon script</code></em> = <code class="literal">scripts\%U.bat</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="log writeable files on exit (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id323660"></a>

log writeable files on exit (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id323661"></a><a name="LOGWRITEABLEFILESONEXIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	When the network connection between a CIFS client and Samba
	dies, Samba has no option but to simply shut down the server
	side of the network connection. If this happens, there is a
	risk of data corruption because the Windows client did not
	complete all write operations that the Windows application
	requested. Setting this option to "yes" makes smbd log with
	a level 0 message a list of all files that have been opened
	for writing when the network connection died. Those are the
	files that are potentially corrupted. It is meant as an aid
	for the administrator to give him a list of files to do
	consistency checks on.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log writeable files on exit</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lppause command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id323707"></a>

lppause command (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id323708"></a><a name="LPPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be 
    executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling 
    a specific print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes 
    a printer name and job number to pause the print job. One way 
    of implementing this is by using job priorities, where jobs 
    having a too low priority won't be sent to the printer.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name 
    is put in its place. A <em class="parameter"><code>%j</code></em> is replaced with 
    the job number (an integer).  On HPUX (see <em class="parameter"><code>printing=hpux
    </code></em>), if the <em class="parameter"><code>-p%p</code></em> option is added 
    to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status, i.e. 
    if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will 
    have the PAUSED status, whereas if  the priority is equal or higher it 
    will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status.</p><p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path 
    in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lppause command</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# Currently no default value is given to 
    this string, unless the value of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> 
    parameter is <code class="constant">SYSV</code>, in which case the default is : 
    <code class="literal">lp -i %p-%j -H hold</code> or if the value of the 
    <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> parameter is 
    <code class="constant">SOFTQ</code>, then the default is: 
    <code class="literal">qstat -s -j%j -h</code>. </code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lppause command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lpq cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id323843"></a>

lpq cache time (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id323844"></a><a name="LPQCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls how long lpq info will be cached 
	for to prevent the <code class="literal">lpq</code> command being called too 
	often. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the <code class="literal">
	lpq</code> command used by the system, so if you use different 
	<code class="literal">lpq</code> commands for different users then they won't
	share cache information.</p><p>The cache files are stored in <code class="filename">/tmp/lpq.xxxx</code> 
	where xxxx is a hash of the <code class="literal">lpq</code> command in use.</p><p>The default is 30 seconds, meaning that the cached results 
	of a previous identical <code class="literal">lpq</code> command will be used 
	if the cached data is less than 30 seconds old. A large value may 
	be advisable if your <code class="literal">lpq</code> command is very slow.</p><p>A value of 0 will disable caching completely.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpq cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">30</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpq cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">10</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lpq command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id323954"></a>

lpq command (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id323956"></a><a name="LPQCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be 
    executed on the server host in order to obtain <code class="literal">lpq
    </code>-style printer status information.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which 
    takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer 
    status information.</p><p>Currently nine styles of printer status information 
    are supported; BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX, CUPS, and SOFTQ. 
    This covers most UNIX systems. You control which type is expected 
    using the <em class="parameter"><code>printing =</code></em> option.</p><p>Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not 
    correctly send the connection number for the printer they are 
    requesting status information about. To get around this, the 
    server reports on the first printer service connected to by the 
    client. This only happens if the connection number sent is invalid.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name 
    is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the 
    command.</p><p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path 
    in the <em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em> as the <code class="envar">$PATH
    </code> may not be available to the server.  When compiled with
    the CUPS libraries, no <em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em> is
    needed because smbd will make a library call to obtain the 
	print queue listing.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpq -P%p</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lpresume command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324071"></a>

lpresume command (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324072"></a><a name="LPRESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be 
    executed on the server host in order to restart or continue 
    printing or spooling a specific print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes 
    a printer name and job number to resume the print job. See 
    also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LPPAUSECOMMAND" target="_top">lppause command</a> parameter.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name 
    is put in its place. A <em class="parameter"><code>%j</code></em> is replaced with 
    the job number (an integer).</p><p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path 
    in the <em class="parameter"><code>lpresume command</code></em> as the PATH may not 
    be available to the server.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: Currently no default value is given 
    to this string, unless the value of the <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> 
    parameter is <code class="constant">SYSV</code>, in which case the default is:</p><p><code class="literal">lp -i %p-%j -H resume</code></p><p>or if the value of the <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> parameter 
    is <code class="constant">SOFTQ</code>, then the default is:</p><p><code class="literal">qstat -s -j%j -r</code></p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpresume command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lprm command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324215"></a>

lprm command (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324216"></a><a name="LPRMCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be 
    executed on the server host in order to delete a print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes 
    a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name 
    is put in its place. A <em class="parameter"><code>%j</code></em> is replaced with 
    the job number (an integer).</p><p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute 
    path in the <em class="parameter"><code>lprm command</code></em> as the PATH may not be 
    available to the server.</p><p>
	Examples of use are:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j

or

lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j
</pre><p>
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lprm command</code></em> = <code class="literal"> determined by printing parameter</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="machine password timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324296"></a>

machine password timeout (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324297"></a><a name="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = domain</a> parameter) then periodically a running smbd process will try and change
	the MACHINE ACCOUNT PASSWORD stored in the TDB called <code class="filename">private/secrets.tdb
	</code>.  This parameter specifies how often this password will be changed, in seconds. The default is one
	week (expressed in seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server.
	</p><p>
	See also <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>,
	and the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = domain</a> parameter.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>machine password timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">604800</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="magic output (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324380"></a>

magic output (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324381"></a><a name="MAGICOUTPUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output created by a magic script (see the 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAGICSCRIPT" target="_top">magic script</a> parameter below).
	</p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>If two clients use the same <em class="parameter"><code>magic script
	</code></em> in the same directory the output file content is undefined.
	</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic output</code></em> = <code class="literal">&lt;magic script name&gt;.out</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic output</code></em> = <code class="literal">myfile.txt</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="magic script (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324460"></a>

magic script (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324461"></a><a name="MAGICSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, 
	if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed. 
	This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and 
	executed on behalf of the connected user.</p><p>Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon 
	completion assuming that the user has the appropriate level 
	of privilege and the file permissions allow the deletion.</p><p>If the script generates output, output will be sent to 
	the file specified by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAGICOUTPUT" target="_top">magic output</a>
	parameter (see above).</p><p>Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts 
	containing CR/LF instead of CR as 
	the end-of-line marker. Magic scripts must be executable 
	<span class="emphasis"><em>as is</em></span> on the host, which for some hosts and 
	some shells will require filtering at the DOS end.</p><p>Magic scripts are <span class="emphasis"><em>EXPERIMENTAL</em></span> and 
		should <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> be relied upon.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic script</code></em> = <code class="literal">user.csh</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="mangled names (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324558"></a>

mangled names (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324559"></a><a name="MANGLEDNAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX 
	should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, 
	or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</p><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a> for 
	details on how to control the mangling process.</p><p>If mangling is used then the mangling method is as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters 
			before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced 
			to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters 
			of the mangled name.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled
			name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the
			original root name (i.e., the original filename minus its final
			extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation
			only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three
			characters.</p><p>Note that the character to use may be specified using 
				the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MANGLINGCHAR" target="_top">mangling char</a>
			option, if you don't like '~'.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be 
			presented as DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as 
			for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as 
			its extension regardless of actual original extension (that's three 
			underscores).</p></li></ul></div><p>The two-digit hash value consists of upper case alphanumeric characters.</p><p>This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files 
	in a directory share the same first five alphanumeric characters. 
	The probability of such a clash is 1/1300.</p><p>The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be 
	copied between UNIX directories from Windows/DOS while retaining 
	the long UNIX filename. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension 
	from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names 
	do not change between sessions.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangled names</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="mangle prefix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324677"></a>

mangle prefix (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324678"></a><a name="MANGLEPREFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the number of prefix
	characters from the original name used when generating
	the mangled names. A larger value will give a weaker
	hash and therefore more name collisions. The minimum
	value is 1 and the maximum value is 6.</p><p>
	mangle prefix is effective only when mangling method is hash2.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangle prefix</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangle prefix</code></em> = <code class="literal">4</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="mangling char (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324741"></a>

mangling char (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324742"></a><a name="MANGLINGCHAR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what character is used as 
	the <span class="emphasis"><em>magic</em></span> character in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>. The 
	default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set 
	it to whatever you prefer. This is effective only when mangling method is hash.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling char</code></em> = <code class="literal">~</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling char</code></em> = <code class="literal">^</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="mangling method (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324815"></a>

mangling method (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324816"></a><a name="MANGLINGMETHOD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the algorithm used for the generating
	the mangled names. Can take two different values, "hash" and
	"hash2". "hash" is the algorithm that was used
	used in Samba for many years and was the default in Samba 2.2.x "hash2" is
        now the default and is newer and considered a better algorithm (generates less collisions) in
        the names. Many Win32 applications store the mangled names and so
	changing to algorithms must not be done lightly as these applications
        may break unless reinstalled.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling method</code></em> = <code class="literal">hash2</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling method</code></em> = <code class="literal">hash</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map acl inherit (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324877"></a>

map acl inherit (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324878"></a><a name="MAPACLINHERIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map the 'inherit' and 'protected'
    access control entry flags stored in Windows ACLs into an extended attribute
    called user.SAMBA_PAI. This parameter only takes effect if Samba is being run
    on a platform that supports extended attributes (Linux and IRIX so far) and
    allows the Windows 2000 ACL editor to correctly use inheritance with the Samba
    POSIX ACL mapping code.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map acl inherit</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map archive (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324930"></a>

map archive (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id324931"></a><a name="MAPARCHIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This controls whether the DOS archive attribute 
	should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit.  The DOS archive bit 
	is set when a file has been modified since its last backup.  One 
	motivation for this option is to keep Samba/your PC from making 
	any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX.  This can 
	be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc...
	</p><p>
	Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a>	parameter to be set such that owner 
	execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 100). See the parameter 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> for details.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map archive</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map hidden (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id324999"></a>

map hidden (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325000"></a><a name="MAPHIDDEN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit.
	</p><p>
	Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> to be set such that the world execute 
	bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 001). See the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> 
	for details.
	</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map readonly (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325053"></a>

map readonly (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325054"></a><a name="MAPREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This controls how the DOS read only attribute should be mapped from a UNIX filesystem.
	</p><p>
	This parameter can take three different values, which tell <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> how to display the read only attribute on files, where either
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES" target="_top">store dos attributes</a> is set to <code class="constant">No</code>, or no extended attribute is
	present. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES" target="_top">store dos attributes</a> is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> then this
	parameter is <span class="emphasis"><em>ignored</em></span>. This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version 3.0.21.
	</p><p>The three settings are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>
		<code class="constant">Yes</code> - The read only DOS attribute is mapped to the inverse of the user
		or owner write bit in the unix permission mode set. If the owner write bit is not set, the
		read only attribute is reported as being set on the file.
		If the read only DOS attribute is set, Samba sets the owner, group and
		others write bits to zero. Write bits set in an ACL are ignored by Samba.
		If the read only DOS attribute is unset, Samba simply sets the write bit of the
		owner to one.
		</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
		<code class="constant">Permissions</code> - The read only DOS attribute is mapped to the effective permissions of
		the connecting user, as evaluated by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> by reading the unix permissions and POSIX ACL (if present).
		If the connecting user does not have permission to modify the file, the read only attribute
		is reported as being set on the file.
		</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
		<code class="constant">No</code> - The read only DOS attribute is unaffected by permissions, and can only be set by
		the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES" target="_top">store dos attributes</a> method. This may be useful for exporting mounted CDs.
		</p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map readonly</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map system (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325195"></a>

map system (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325196"></a><a name="MAPSYSTEM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit.
	</p><p>
	Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a>	to be set such that the group 
	execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 010). See the parameter 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> for details.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map system</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map to guest (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325262"></a>

map to guest (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325263"></a><a name="MAPTOGUEST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only useful in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">SECURITY = 
    security</a> modes other than <em class="parameter"><code>security = share</code></em> 
    and <em class="parameter"><code>security = server</code></em>
    - i.e. <code class="constant">user</code>, and <code class="constant">domain</code>.</p><p>This parameter can take four different values, which tell
    <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> what to do with user 
    login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way.</p><p>The four settings are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">Never</code> - Means user login 
	    requests with an invalid password are rejected. This is the 
	    default.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">Bad User</code> - Means user
	    logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username 
	    does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and 
	    mapped into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">Bad Password</code> - Means user logins 
	    with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped 
	    into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>. Note that 
	    this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing 
	    their password will be silently logged on as "guest" - and 
	    will not know the reason they cannot access files they think
	    they should - there will have been no message given to them
	    that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services will
	    <span class="emphasis"><em>hate</em></span> you if you set the <em class="parameter"><code>map to 
	    guest</code></em> parameter this way :-).</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">Bad Uid</code> - Is only applicable when Samba is configured
	    in some type of domain mode security (security = {domain|ads}) and means that
	    user logins which are successfully authenticated but which have no valid Unix
	    user account (and smbd is unable to create one) should be mapped to the defined
	    guest account. This was the default behavior of Samba 2.x releases.  Note that 
	    if a member server is running winbindd,  this option should never be required
	    because the nss_winbind library will export the Windows domain users and groups
	    to the underlying OS via the Name Service Switch interface.</p></li></ul></div><p>Note that this parameter is needed to set up "Guest" 
    share services when using <em class="parameter"><code>security</code></em> modes other than 
    share and server. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being
    requested is <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> sent to the server until after 
    the server has successfully authenticated the client so the server 
    cannot make authentication decisions at the correct time (connection 
    to the share) for "Guest" shares. This parameter is not useful with
    <em class="parameter"><code>security = server</code></em> as in this security mode
    no information is returned about whether a user logon failed due to
    a bad username or bad password, the same error is returned from a modern server
    in both cases.</p><p>For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this 
    parameter maps to the old compile-time setting of the <code class="constant">
		GUEST_SESSSETUP</code> value in local.h.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map to guest</code></em> = <code class="literal">Never</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map to guest</code></em> = <code class="literal">Bad User</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map untrusted to domain (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325478"></a>

map untrusted to domain (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325479"></a><a name="MAPUNTRUSTEDTODOMAIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    If a client connects to smbd using an untrusted domain name, such as
    BOGUS\user, smbd replaces the BOGUS domain with it's SAM name before
    attempting to authenticate that user.  In the case where smbd is acting as
    a PDC this will be DOMAIN\user.  In the case where smbd is acting as a
    domain member server or a standalone server this will be WORKSTATION\user.
    </p><p>
    In previous versions of Samba (pre 3.4), if smbd was acting as a domain
    member server, the BOGUS domain name would instead be replaced by the
    primary domain which smbd was a member of.  In this case authentication
    would be deferred off to a DC using the credentials DOMAIN\user.
    </p><p>
    When this parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> smbd provides the
    legacy behavior of mapping untrusted domain names to the primary domain.
    When smbd is not acting as a domain member server, this parameter has no
    effect.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map untrusted to domain</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max connections (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325536"></a>

max connections (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325537"></a><a name="MAXCONNECTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited.
    If <em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> is greater than 0 then connections
    will be refused if this number of connections to the service are already open. A value 
    of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made.</p><p>Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The lock files will be stored in 
    the directory specified by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKDIRECTORY" target="_top">lock directory</a> option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> = <code class="literal">10</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max disk size (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325617"></a>

max disk size (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325618"></a><a name="MAXDISKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to put an upper limit 
    on the apparent size of disks. If you set this option to 100 
    then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in 
    size.</p><p>Note that this option does not limit the amount of 
    data you can put on the disk. In the above case you could still 
    store much more than 100 MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks 
    for the amount of free disk space or the total disk size then the 
    result will be bounded by the amount specified in <em class="parameter"><code>max 
    disk size</code></em>.</p><p>This option is primarily useful to work around bugs 
    in some pieces of software that can't handle very large disks, 
    particularly disks over 1GB in size.</p><p>A <em class="parameter"><code>max disk size</code></em> of 0 means no limit.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max disk size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max disk size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max log size (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325702"></a>

max log size (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325703"></a><a name="MAXLOGSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log file should grow to. 
    Samba periodically checks the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding 
	a <code class="filename">.old</code> extension.
	</p><p>A size of 0 means no limit.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max log size</code></em> = <code class="literal">5000</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max log size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max mux (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325771"></a>

max mux (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325772"></a><a name="MAXMUX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum number of 
    outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client 
	it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max mux</code></em> = <code class="literal">50</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max open files (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325812"></a>

max open files (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325813"></a><a name="MAXOPENFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of
    open files that one <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> file
    serving process may have open for a client at any one time. The
    This parameter can be set very high (16404) as Samba uses
    only one bit per unopened file. Setting this parameter lower than
    16404 will cause Samba to complain and set this value back to
    the minimum of 16404, as Windows 7 depends on this number of
    open file handles being available.</p><p>The limit of the number of open files is usually set
    by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than
    this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max open files</code></em> = <code class="literal">16404</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max print jobs (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325869"></a>

max print jobs (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325870"></a><a name="MAXPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of 
    jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment.
    If this number is exceeded, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will remote "Out of Space" to the client.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">5000</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="protocol"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325937"></a>

<a name="PROTOCOL"></a>protocol
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325938"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max protocol (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id325969"></a>

max protocol (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id325970"></a><a name="MAXPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest 
    protocol level that will be supported by the server.</p><p>Possible values are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">CORE</code>: Earliest version. No 
	    concept of user names.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">COREPLUS</code>: Slight improvements on 
	    CORE for efficiency.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">LANMAN1</code>: First <span class="emphasis"><em>
	    modern</em></span> version of the protocol. Long filename
	    support.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">LANMAN2</code>: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">NT1</code>: Current up to date version of the protocol. 
	    Used by Windows NT. Known as CIFS.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">SMB2</code>: Re-implementation of the SMB protocol.
	    Used by Windows Vista and newer. The Samba implementation of SMB2 is
	    currently marked experimental!</p></li></ul></div><p>Normally this option should not be set as the automatic 
    negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing 
	the appropriate protocol.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">NT1</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">LANMAN1</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max reported print jobs (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326099"></a>

max reported print jobs (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326100"></a><a name="MAXREPORTEDPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs displayed in a port monitor for 
    Samba printer queue at any given moment. If this number is exceeded, the excess 
    jobs will not be shown. A value of zero means there is no limit on the number of 
    print jobs reported.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max reported print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max reported print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max smbd processes (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326158"></a>

max smbd processes (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326159"></a><a name="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> processes concurrently running on a system and is intended
    as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event that the server has insufficient
    resources to handle more than this number of connections.  Remember that under normal operating
    conditions, each user will have an <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> associated with him or her to handle connections to all
    shares from a given host.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max smbd processes</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max smbd processes</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max stat cache size (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326235"></a>

max stat cache size (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326236"></a><a name="MAXSTATCACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the size in memory of any 
	  <em class="parameter"><code>stat cache</code></em> being used
	  to speed up case insensitive name mappings. It represents
	  the number of kilobyte (1024) units the stat cache can use.
	  A value of zero, meaning unlimited, is not advisable due to
	  increased memory usage.  You should not need to change this
	  parameter.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max stat cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">256</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max stat cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">100</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max ttl (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326301"></a>

max ttl (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326302"></a><a name="MAXTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> what the default 'time to live' 
    of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when <code class="literal">nmbd</code> is 
    requesting a name using either a broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should 
	never need to change this parameter. The default is 3 days.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">259200</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max wins ttl (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326358"></a>

max wins ttl (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326359"></a><a name="MAXWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server
	(<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT" target="_top">wins support = yes</a>) what the maximum
    'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> 
    will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this
	parameter.  The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max wins ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">518400</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max xmit (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326426"></a>

max xmit (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326428"></a><a name="MAXXMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum packet size 
    that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 16644, which 
    matches the behavior of Windows 2000.  A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems.
    You should never need to change this parameter from its default value.
</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max xmit</code></em> = <code class="literal">16644</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max xmit</code></em> = <code class="literal">8192</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="message command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326486"></a>

message command (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326488"></a><a name="MESSAGECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what command to run when the 
	server receives a WinPopup style message.</p><p>This would normally be a command that would 
	deliver the message somehow. How this is to be done is 
	up to your imagination.</p><p>An example is:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<code class="literal">message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &amp;</code>
</pre><p>
	</p><p>This delivers the message using <code class="literal">xedit</code>, then 
	removes it afterwards. <span class="emphasis"><em>NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT 
	THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY</em></span>. That's why I 
	have the '&amp;' on the end. If it doesn't return immediately then 
	your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover 
	after 30 seconds, hopefully).</p><p>All messages are delivered as the global guest user. 
	The command takes the standard substitutions, although <em class="parameter"><code>
	%u</code></em> won't work (<em class="parameter"><code>%U</code></em> may be better 
	in this case).</p><p>Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional 
	ones apply. In particular:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%s</code></em> = the filename containing 
				the message.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%t</code></em> = the destination that 
				the message was sent to (probably the server name).</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%f</code></em> = who the message 
				is from.</p></li></ul></div><p>You could make this command send mail, or whatever else 
	takes your fancy. Please let us know of any really interesting 
	ideas you have.</p><p>
	Here's a way of sending the messages as mail to root:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<code class="literal">message command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on %m' root &lt; %s; rm %s</code>
</pre><p>
	</p><p>If you don't have a message command then the message 
	won't be delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was 
	an error. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code 
	and carries on regardless, saying that the message was delivered.
	</p><p>
	If you want to silently delete it then try:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<code class="literal">message command = rm %s</code>
</pre><p>
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>message command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>message command</code></em> = <code class="literal">csh -c 'xedit %s; rm %s' &amp;</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="min print space (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326678"></a>

min print space (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326679"></a><a name="MINPRINTSPACE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the minimum amount of free disk 
    space that must be available before a user will be able to spool 
    a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which 
    means a user can always spool a print job.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min print space</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min print space</code></em> = <code class="literal">2000</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="min protocol (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326738"></a>

min protocol (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326739"></a><a name="MINPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the 
    lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support.  Please refer
    to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXPROTOCOL" target="_top">max protocol</a>
    parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description
    of each.  You may also wish to refer to the C source code in
    <code class="filename">source/smbd/negprot.c</code> for a listing of known protocol
    dialects supported by clients.</p><p>If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should
    also refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LANMANAUTH" target="_top">lanman auth</a> parameter.  Otherwise, you should never need 
    to change this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">CORE</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">NT1</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="min receivefile size (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326831"></a>

min receivefile size (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326832"></a><a name="MINRECEIVEFILESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option changes the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when processing SMBwriteX calls. Any incoming
SMBwriteX call on a non-signed SMB/CIFS connection greater than this value will not be processed in the normal way but will
be passed to any underlying kernel recvfile or splice system call (if there is no such
call Samba will emulate in user space). This allows zero-copy writes directly from network
socket buffers into the filesystem buffer cache, if available. It may improve performance
but user testing is recommended. If set to zero Samba processes SMBwriteX calls in the
normal way. To enable POSIX large write support (SMB/CIFS writes up to 16Mb) this option must be
nonzero. The maximum value is 128k. Values greater than 128k will be silently set to 128k.</p><p>Note this option will have NO EFFECT if set on a SMB signed connection.</p><p>The default is zero, which diables this option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min receivefile size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="min wins ttl (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326892"></a>

min wins ttl (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326894"></a><a name="MINWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>
    when acting as a WINS server (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT" target="_top">wins support = yes</a>) what the minimum 'time to live' 
    of NetBIOS names that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will grant will be (in 
    seconds). You should never need to change this parameter.  The default 
    is 6 hours (21600 seconds).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min wins ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">21600</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="msdfs proxy (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id326960"></a>

msdfs proxy (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id326961"></a><a name="MSDFSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter indicates that the share is a
	stand-in for another CIFS share whose location is specified by
	the value of the parameter. When clients attempt to connect to
	this share, they are redirected to the proxied share using
	the SMB-Dfs protocol.</p><p>Only Dfs roots can act as proxy shares. Take a look at the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT" target="_top">msdfs root</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTMSDFS" target="_top">host msdfs</a>
	options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">\otherserver\someshare</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="msdfs root (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327033"></a>

msdfs root (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327034"></a><a name="MSDFSROOT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, Samba treats the
	share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the
	distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory.
	Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic
	links of the form <code class="filename">msdfs:serverA\\shareA,serverB\\shareB</code>
	and so on.  For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on
	Samba, refer to the MSDFS chapter in the Samba3-HOWTO book.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs root</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="multicast dns register (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327086"></a>

multicast dns register (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327087"></a><a name="MULTICASTDNSREGISTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If compiled with proper support for it, Samba will
        announce itself with multicast DNS services like for example
        provided by the Avahi daemon.</p><p>This parameter allows disabling Samba to register
	itself.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>multicast dns register</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="name cache timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327132"></a>

name cache timeout (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327133"></a><a name="NAMECACHETIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the number of seconds it takes before 
    entries in samba's hostname resolve cache time out. If 
    the timeout is set to 0. the caching is disabled.
</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name cache timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">660</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name cache timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="name resolve order (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327190"></a>

name resolve order (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327191"></a><a name="NAMERESOLVEORDER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used by the programs in the Samba 
    suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order 
    to resolve host names to IP addresses. Its main purpose to is to
    control how netbios name resolution is performed.  The option takes a space 
    separated string of name resolution options.</p><p>The options are: "lmhosts", "host",
    "wins" and "bcast". They cause names to be
    resolved as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>
		<code class="constant">lmhosts</code> : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has 
	    no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the manpage for lmhosts for details) then
	    any name type matches for lookup.
		</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
		<code class="constant">host</code> : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system
		<code class="filename">/etc/hosts </code>, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution is
		operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the <code class="filename">/etc/nsswitch.conf</code> file.  Note that this method is used only if the NetBIOS name
		type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type or 0x1c (domain controllers).  The latter case is only
		useful for active directory domains and results in a DNS query for the SRV RR entry matching
		_ldap._tcp.domain.
	</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">wins</code> : Query a name with 
	    the IP address listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSERVER" target="_top">WINSSERVER</a> parameter.  If no WINS server has
	    been specified this method will be ignored.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">bcast</code> : Do a broadcast on 
	    each of the known local interfaces listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> 
	    parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution 
	    methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally 
	    connected subnet.</p></li></ul></div><p>The example below will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined 
    first, followed by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal 
    system hostname lookup.</p><p>When Samba is functioning in ADS security mode (<code class="literal">security = ads</code>)
    it is advised to use following settings for <em class="parameter"><code>name resolve order</code></em>:</p><p><code class="literal">name resolve order = wins bcast</code></p><p>DC lookups will still be done via DNS, but fallbacks to netbios names will
		not inundate your DNS servers with needless querys for DOMAIN&lt;0x1c&gt; lookups.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name resolve order</code></em> = <code class="literal">lmhosts wins host bcast</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name resolve order</code></em> = <code class="literal">lmhosts bcast host</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ncalrpc dir (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327373"></a>

ncalrpc dir (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327374"></a><a name="NCALRPCDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This directory will hold a series of named pipes to allow RPC over inter-process communication.  </p>.
	<p>This will allow Samba and other unix processes to interact over DCE/RPC without using TCP/IP.  Additionally a sub-directory 'np' has restricted permissions, and allows a trusted communication channel between Samba processes</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ncalrpc dir</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/var/ncalrpc</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ncalrpc dir</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/samba/ncalrpc</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="netbios aliases (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327437"></a>

netbios aliases (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327438"></a><a name="NETBIOSALIASES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will 
        advertise as additional names by which the Samba server is known. This allows one machine 
	to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If a machine is acting as a browse server 
        or logon server none of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon 
	servers, only the primary name of the machine will be advertised with these capabilities.
        </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios aliases</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# empty string (no additional names)</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios aliases</code></em> = <code class="literal">TEST TEST1 TEST2</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="netbios name (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327499"></a>

netbios name (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327500"></a><a name="NETBIOSNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
		This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known. By default it is the same as the first component
		of the host's DNS name. If a machine is a browse server or logon server this name (or the first component of
		the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are advertised under.
		</p><p>
		There is a bug in Samba-3 that breaks operation of browsing and access to shares if the netbios name
		is set to the literal name <code class="literal">PIPE</code>. To avoid this problem, do not name your Samba-3
		server <code class="literal">PIPE</code>.
		</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios name</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# machine DNS name</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios name</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYNAME</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="netbios scope (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327574"></a>

netbios scope (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327575"></a><a name="NETBIOSSCOPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will 
	operate under. This should not be set unless every machine 
	on your LAN also sets this value.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios scope</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="nis homedir (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327615"></a>

nis homedir (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327616"></a><a name="NISHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For 
	UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory 
	will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote 
	server. </p><p>When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory 
	server, but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two 
	network hops would be required to access the users home directory 
	if the logon server told the client to use itself as the SMB server 
	for home directories (one over SMB and one over NFS). This can 
	be very slow.</p><p>This option allows Samba to return the home share as 
	being on a different server to the logon server and as 
	long as a Samba daemon is running on the home directory server, 
	it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory 
	server. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it 
	will consult the NIS map specified in
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOMEDIRMAP" target="_top">homedir map</a> and return the server 
	listed there.</p><p>Note that for this option to work there must be a working 
	NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also 
	be a logon server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nis homedir</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="nmbd bind explicit broadcast (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327686"></a>

nmbd bind explicit broadcast (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327687"></a><a name="NMBDBINDEXPLICITBROADCAST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This option causes <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to explicitly bind to the
	broadcast address of the local subnets. This is needed to make nmbd
	work correctly in combination with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SOCKETADDRESS" target="_top">socket address</a> option.
	You should not need to unset this option.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nmbd bind explicit broadcast</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="nt acl support (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327749"></a>

nt acl support (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327750"></a><a name="NTACLSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map 
    UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists.  The UNIX
    permissions considered are the the traditional UNIX owner and
    group permissions, as well as POSIX ACLs set on any files or
    directories.  This parameter was formally a global parameter in
    releases prior to 2.2.2.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt acl support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ntlm auth (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327800"></a>

ntlm auth (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327802"></a><a name="NTLMAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to
    authenticate users using the NTLM encrypted password response.
    If disabled, either the lanman password hash or an NTLMv2 response
    will need to be sent by the client.</p><p>If this option, and <code class="literal">lanman
    auth</code> are both disabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be
    permited.  Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require
	special configuration to use it.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ntlm auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="nt pipe support (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327861"></a>

nt pipe support (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327862"></a><a name="NTPIPESUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether 
    <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will allow Windows NT 
    clients to connect to the NT SMB specific <code class="constant">IPC$</code> 
    pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left
	alone.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt pipe support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="nt status support (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327914"></a>

nt status support (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327915"></a><a name="NTSTATUSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will negotiate NT specific status
    support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients. This is a developer debugging option and should be left alone.
    If this option is set to <code class="constant">no</code> then Samba offers
    exactly the same DOS error codes that versions prior to Samba 2.2.3
    reported.</p><p>You should not need to ever disable this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt status support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="null passwords (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id327972"></a>

null passwords (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id327973"></a><a name="NULLPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords. </p><p>See also <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>null passwords</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="obey pam restrictions (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328024"></a>

obey pam restrictions (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328025"></a><a name="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba 3.0 is configured to enable PAM support
    (i.e. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba
    should obey PAM's account and session management directives.  The 
    default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only
    and to ignore any account or session management.  Note that Samba
    always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypt passwords = yes</a>.  The reason 
    is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response
    authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption.
</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>obey pam restrictions</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="only user (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328081"></a>

only user (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328082"></a><a name="ONLYUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean option that controls whether 
    connections with usernames not in the <em class="parameter"><code>user</code></em> 
    list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a 
    client can supply a username to be used by the server.  Enabling
    this parameter will force the server to only use the login 
    names from the <em class="parameter"><code>user</code></em> list and is only really
    useful in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = share</a> level security.</p><p>Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce 
    usernames from the service name. This can be annoying for 
    the [homes] section. To get around this you could use <code class="literal">user =
    %S</code> which means your <em class="parameter"><code>user</code></em> list
    will be just the service name, which for home directories is the 
    name of the user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>only user</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="oplock break wait time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328164"></a>

oplock break wait time (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328165"></a><a name="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too 
	quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock break request, then the network client can 
	fail and not respond to the break request. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) is the amount 
	of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break request to such (broken) clients.
	</p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>
	DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE.
	</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplock break wait time</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="oplock contention limit (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328213"></a>

oplock contention limit (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328214"></a><a name="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is a <span class="emphasis"><em>very</em></span> advanced <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> tuning option to improve the efficiency of the 
	granting of oplocks under multiple client contention for the same file.
	</p><p>
	In brief it specifies a number, which causes <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>not to grant an oplock even when requested if the 
	approximate number of clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this 
	limit. This causes <code class="literal">smbd</code> to behave in a similar 
	way to Windows NT.
	</p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>
	DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE.
	</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplock contention limit</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="oplocks (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328291"></a>

oplocks (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328292"></a><a name="OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This boolean option tells <code class="literal">smbd</code> whether to 
	issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this 
	share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve 
	the speed of access to files on Samba servers. It allows the clients 
	to aggressively cache files locally and you may want to disable this 
	option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by 
	default in Windows NT Servers).
	</p><p>
	Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a share. See 
	the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOOPLOCKFILES" target="_top">veto oplock files</a> parameter. On some systems 
	oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system. This 
	allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files, 
	whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#KERNELOPLOCKS" target="_top">kernel oplocks</a> parameter for details.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="os2 driver map (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328368"></a>

os2 driver map (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328369"></a><a name="OS2DRIVERMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The parameter is used to define the absolute
    path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver
    names to OS/2 printer driver names.  The format is:</p><p>&lt;nt driver name&gt; = &lt;os2 driver name&gt;.&lt;device name&gt;</p><p>For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5
    printer driver would appear as <code class="literal">HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP 
    LaserJet 5L</code>.</p><p>
    The need for the file is due to the printer driver namespace problem described in 
    the chapter on Classical Printing in the Samba3-HOWTO book.  For more
    details on OS/2 clients, please refer to chapter on other clients in the Samba3-HOWTO book.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>os2 driver map</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="os level (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328428"></a>

os level (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328429"></a><a name="OSLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this
	parameter determines whether <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> in the local broadcast area.
</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>
	Note:</em></span> By default, Samba will win a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating
	systems except a Windows NT 4.0/2000 Domain Controller. This means that a misconfigured Samba host can
	effectively isolate a subnet for browsing purposes. This parameter is largely auto-configured in the Samba-3
	release series and it is seldom necessary to manually override the default setting. Please refer to
	the chapter on Network Browsing in the Samba-3 HOWTO document for further information regarding the use
	of this parameter.
	<span class="emphasis"><em>Note:</em></span> The maximum value for this parameter is 255. If you use higher values, counting
	will start at 0!
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>os level</code></em> = <code class="literal">20</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>os level</code></em> = <code class="literal">65</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="pam password change (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328522"></a>

pam password change (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328523"></a><a name="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, 
    this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control 
    flag for Samba.  If enabled, then PAM will be used for password
    changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in 
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDPROGRAM" target="_top">passwd program</a>. 
    It should be possible to enable this without changing your 
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDCHAT" target="_top">passwd chat</a> parameter for most setups.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pam password change</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="panic action (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328589"></a>

panic action (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328590"></a><a name="PANICACTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a Samba developer option that allows a 
	system command to be called when either <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> or <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>	crashes. This is usually used to 
	draw attention to the fact that a problem occurred.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>panic action</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>panic action</code></em> = <code class="literal">"/bin/sleep 90000"</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="paranoid server security (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328662"></a>

paranoid server security (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328663"></a><a name="PARANOIDSERVERSECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some version of NT 4.x allow non-guest 
    users with a bad passowrd. When this option is enabled, samba will not 
    use a broken NT 4.x server as password server, but instead complain
    to the logs and exit.  
    </p><p>Disabling this option prevents Samba from making
    this check, which involves deliberatly attempting a
    bad logon to the remote server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>paranoid server security</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passdb backend (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328710"></a>

passdb backend (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328711"></a><a name="PASSDBBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the administrator to chose which backend
    will be used for storing user and possibly group information.  This allows 
    you to swap between different storage mechanisms without recompile. </p><p>The parameter value is divided into two parts, the backend's name, and a 'location'
    string that has meaning only to that particular backed.  These are separated
    by a : character.</p><p>Available backends can include:
	</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> - The old plaintext passdb
		backend. Some Samba features will not work if this passdb
		backend is used. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an
		optional argument.
		</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">tdbsam</code> - The TDB based password storage
                backend.  Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb 
                in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRIVATEDIR" target="_top">private dir</a> directory.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">ldapsam</code> - The LDAP based passdb 
                backend.  Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to 
                <code class="literal">ldap://localhost</code>)</p><p>LDAP connections should be secured where possible.  This may be done using either
                Start-TLS (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL" target="_top">ldap ssl</a>) or by
                specifying <em class="parameter"><code>ldaps://</code></em> in
                the URL argument. </p><p>Multiple servers may also be specified in double-quotes.
		Whether multiple servers are supported or not and the exact
		syntax depends on the LDAP library you use.
		</p></li></ul></div><p>

    </p>
	Examples of use are:
<pre class="programlisting">
passdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb 

or multi server LDAP URL with OpenLDAP library:

passdb backend = ldapsam:"ldap://ldap-1.example.com ldap://ldap-2.example.com"

or multi server LDAP URL with Netscape based LDAP library:

passdb backend = ldapsam:"ldap://ldap-1.example.com ldap-2.example.com"
</pre><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passdb backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">tdbsam</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passdb expand explicit (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328854"></a>

passdb expand explicit (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328855"></a><a name="PASSDBEXPANDEXPLICIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter controls whether Samba substitutes %-macros in the passdb fields if they are explicitly set. We
	used to expand macros here, but this turned out to be a bug because the Windows client can expand a variable
	%G_osver% in which %G would have been substituted by the user's primary group.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passdb expand explicit</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passwd chat debug (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328897"></a>

passwd chat debug (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328898"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script 
    parameter is run in <span class="emphasis"><em>debug</em></span> mode. In this mode the 
    strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed 
    in the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> log with a 
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGLEVEL" target="_top">debug level</a> 
    of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords 
    to be seen in the <code class="literal">smbd</code> log. It is available to help 
    Samba admins debug their <em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat</code></em> scripts 
    when calling the <em class="parameter"><code>passwd program</code></em> and should 
    be turned off after this has been done. This option has no effect if the 
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" target="_top">pam password change</a>
	parameter is set. This parameter is off by default.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat debug</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passwd chat timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id328993"></a>

passwd chat timeout (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id328994"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This integer specifies the number of seconds smbd will wait for an initial
    answer from a passwd chat script being run. Once the initial answer is received
    the subsequent answers must be received in one tenth of this time. The default it
    two seconds.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passwd chat (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id329036"></a>

passwd chat (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id329037"></a><a name="PASSWDCHAT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This string controls the <span class="emphasis"><em>"chat"</em></span> 
    conversation that takes places between <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and the local password changing
    program to change the user's password. The string describes a 
    sequence of response-receive pairs that <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> uses to determine what to send to the 
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDPROGRAM" target="_top">passwd program</a> and what to expect back. If the expected output is not 
    received then the password is not changed.</p><p>This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending 
    on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS 
    etc).</p><p>Note that this parameter only is used if the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" target="_top">unix password sync</a> parameter is set  to <code class="constant">yes</code>. This sequence is 
    then called <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> when the SMB password  in the 
    smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old password
    cleartext. This means that root must be able to reset the user's password without
    knowing the text of the previous password. In the presence of
    NIS/YP,  this means that the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDPROGRAM" target="_top">passwd program</a> must
    be executed on the NIS master.
    </p><p>The string can contain the macro <em class="parameter"><code>%n</code></em> which is substituted 
    for the new password.  The old passsword (<em class="parameter"><code>%o</code></em>) is only available when
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypt passwords</a> has been disabled.
    The chat sequence can also contain the standard macros 
    \n, \r, \t and \s to give line-feed, carriage-return, tab 
    and space.  The chat sequence string can also contain 
    a '*' which matches any sequence of characters. Double quotes can 
    be used to collect strings with spaces in them into a single 
    string.</p><p>If the send string in any part of the chat sequence  is a full
    stop ".",  then no string is sent. Similarly,  if the
    expect string is a full stop then no string is expected.</p><p>If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" target="_top">pam password change</a> parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, the
	chat pairs may be matched in any order, and success is determined by the PAM result, not any particular
	output. The \n macro is ignored for PAM conversions.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat</code></em> = <code class="literal">*new*password* %n\n*new*password* %n\n *changed*</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat</code></em> = <code class="literal">"*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password changed*"</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passwd program (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id329219"></a>

passwd program (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id329220"></a><a name="PASSWDPROGRAM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to set 
    UNIX user passwords.  Any occurrences of <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em> 
    will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for 
    existence before calling the password changing program.</p><p>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <span class="emphasis"><em>reasonable
    </em></span> passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion 
    of mixed case chars and digits. This can pose a problem as some clients 
    (such as Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending 
    it.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Note</em></span> that if the <em class="parameter"><code>unix 
    password sync</code></em> parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes
    </code> then this program is called <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> 
    before the SMB password in the smbpasswd
    file is changed. If this UNIX password change fails, then 
    <code class="literal">smbd</code> will fail to change the SMB password also 
    (this is by design).</p><p>If the <em class="parameter"><code>unix password sync</code></em> parameter 
    is set this parameter <span class="emphasis"><em>MUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS</em></span> 
    for <span class="emphasis"><em>ALL</em></span> programs called, and must be examined 
    for security implications. Note that by default <em class="parameter"><code>unix 
    password sync</code></em> is set to <code class="constant">no</code>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd program</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd program</code></em> = <code class="literal">/bin/passwd %u</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="password level (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id329346"></a>

password level (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id329347"></a><a name="PASSWORDLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some client/server combinations have difficulty 
    with mixed-case passwords.  One offending client is Windows for 
    Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper 
    case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when 
    using COREPLUS!  Another problem child is the Windows 95/98
    family of operating systems.  These clients upper case clear
    text passwords even when NT LM 0.12 selected by the protocol
    negotiation request/response.</p><p>This deprecated parameter defines the maximum number of characters
    that may be upper case in passwords.</p><p>For example, say the password given was "FRED". If <em class="parameter"><code>
    password level</code></em> is set to 1, the following combinations 
    would be tried if "FRED" failed:</p><p>"Fred", "fred", "fRed", "frEd","freD"</p><p>If <em class="parameter"><code>password level</code></em> was set to 2, 
    the following combinations would also be tried: </p><p>"FRed", "FrEd", "FreD", "fREd", "fReD", "frED", ..</p><p>And so on.</p><p>The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely 
    it is that a mixed case password will be matched against a single 
    case password. However, you should be aware that use of this 
    parameter reduces security and increases the time taken to 
    process a new connection.</p><p>A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be 
    made - the password as is and the password in all-lower case.</p><p>This parameter is used only when using plain-text passwords. It is
    not at all used when encrypted passwords as in use (that is the default
    since samba-3.0.0). Use this only when <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypt passwords = No</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password level</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password level</code></em> = <code class="literal">4</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="password server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id329468"></a>

password server (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id329469"></a><a name="PASSWORDSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>By specifying the name of another SMB server 
    or Active Directory domain controller with this option, 
    and using <code class="literal">security = [ads|domain|server]</code> 
    it is possible to get Samba
    to do all its username/password validation using a specific remote server.</p><p>If the <em class="parameter"><code>security</code></em> parameter is set to
    <code class="constant">domain</code> or <code class="constant">ads</code>, then this option
    <span class="emphasis"><em>should not</em></span> be used, as the default '*' indicates to Samba
    to determine the best DC to contact dynamically, just as all other hosts in an
    AD domain do.  This allows the domain to be maintained without modification to
    the smb.conf file.  The cryptograpic protection on the authenticated RPC calls
    used to verify passwords ensures that this default is safe.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>It is strongly recommended that you use the
    default of '*'</em></span>, however if in your particular
    environment you have reason to specify a particular DC list, then
    the list of machines in this option must be a list of names or IP
    addresses of Domain controllers for the Domain. If you use the
    default of '*', or list several hosts in the <em class="parameter"><code>password server</code></em> option then <code class="literal">smbd </code> will try each in turn till it
    finds one that responds.  This is useful in case your primary
    server goes down.</p><p>If the list of servers contains both names/IP's and the '*'
    character, the list is treated as a list of preferred 
    domain controllers, but an auto lookup of all remaining DC's
    will be added to the list as well.  Samba will not attempt to optimize 
    this list by locating the closest DC.</p><p>If parameter is a name, it is looked up using the
    parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMERESOLVEORDER" target="_top">name resolve order</a> and so may resolved
    by any method and order described in that parameter.</p><p>If the <em class="parameter"><code>security</code></em> parameter is 
    set to <code class="constant">server</code>, these additional restrictions apply:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>You may list several password servers in 
	    the <em class="parameter"><code>password server</code></em> parameter, however if an 
	    <code class="literal">smbd</code> makes a connection to a password server, 
	    and then the password server fails, no more users will be able 
	    to be authenticated from this <code class="literal">smbd</code>.  This is a 
	    restriction of the SMB/CIFS protocol when in <code class="literal">security = server
	    </code> mode and cannot be fixed in Samba.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>You will have to ensure that your users
	    are able to login from the Samba server, as when in <code class="literal">
	    security = server</code>  mode the network logon will appear to 
	    come from the Samba server rather than from the users workstation.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The client must not select NTLMv2 authentication.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The password server must be a machine capable of using
	  the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in
	  user level security mode.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Using a password server  means your UNIX box (running
	  Samba) is only as secure as (a host masqurading as) your password server. <span class="emphasis"><em>DO NOT
	  CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT  YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</em></span>.
	  </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Never point a Samba server at itself for password serving.
	  This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba  server!</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The name of the password server takes the standard
	  substitutions, but probably the only useful one is <em class="parameter"><code>%m
	  </code></em>, which means the Samba server will use the incoming
	  client as the password server. If you use this then you better
	  trust your clients, and you had better restrict them with hosts allow!</p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password server</code></em> = <code class="literal">*</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password server</code></em> = <code class="literal">NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2, *</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password server</code></em> = <code class="literal">windc.mydomain.com:389 192.168.1.101 *</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="directory"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id329728"></a>

<a name="DIRECTORY"></a>directory
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id329729"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PATH">path</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="path (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id329759"></a>

path (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id329760"></a><a name="PATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a directory to which 
	the user of the service is to be given access. In the case of 
	printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to 
	being submitted to the host for printing.</p><p>For a printable service offering guest access, the service 
	should be readonly and the path should be world-writeable and 
	have the sticky bit set. This is not mandatory of course, but 
	you probably won't get the results you expect if you do 
	otherwise.</p><p>Any occurrences of <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em> in the path 
	will be replaced with the UNIX username that the client is using 
	on this connection. Any occurrences of <em class="parameter"><code>%m</code></em> 
	will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are 
	connecting from. These replacements are very useful for setting 
	up pseudo home directories for users.</p><p>Note that this path will be based on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ROOTDIR" target="_top">root dir</a>
	 if one was specified.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>path</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>path</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home/fred</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="perfcount module (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id329856"></a>

perfcount module (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id329857"></a><a name="PERFCOUNTMODULE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the perfcount backend to be used when monitoring SMB
	operations.  Only one perfcount module may be used, and it must implement all of the
	apis contained in the smb_perfcount_handler structure defined in smb.h.
	</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="pid directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id329887"></a>

pid directory (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id329888"></a><a name="PIDDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This option specifies the directory where pid files will be placed.  
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pid directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/var/locks</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pid directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">pid directory = /var/run/</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="posix locking (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id329944"></a>

posix locking (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id329945"></a><a name="POSIXLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	The <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>
	daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients. The default behavior is 
	to map this internal database to POSIX locks. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are 
	consistent with those seen by POSIX compliant applications accessing the files via a non-SMB 
	method (e.g. NFS or local file access). It is very unlikely that you need to set this parameter
	to "no", unless you are sharing from an NFS mount, which is not a good idea in the first place.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>posix locking</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="postexec (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330001"></a>

postexec (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330002"></a><a name="POSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run 
	whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual 
	substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some 
	systems.</p><p>An interesting example may be to unmount server 
	resources:</p><p><code class="literal">postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom</code></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>postexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>postexec</code></em> = <code class="literal">echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\" &gt;&gt; /tmp/log</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preexec close (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330070"></a>

preexec close (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330072"></a><a name="PREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PREEXEC" target="_top">preexec</a> 
	should close the service being connected to.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preexec close</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="exec"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330123"></a>

<a name="EXEC"></a>exec
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330124"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREEXEC">preexec</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preexec (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330154"></a>

preexec (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330156"></a><a name="PREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever 
	the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.</p><p>An interesting example is to send the users a welcome 
	message every time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here 
	is an example:</p><p>
	<code class="literal">preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" |
	/usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' &amp; </code>
	</p><p>Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)</p><p>
	See also <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PREEXECCLOSE" target="_top">preexec close</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#POSTEXEC" target="_top">postexec</a>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preexec</code></em> = <code class="literal">echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" &gt;&gt; /tmp/log</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="prefered master"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330256"></a>

<a name="PREFEREDMASTER"></a>prefered master
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330257"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREFERREDMASTER">preferred master</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preferred master (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330288"></a>

preferred master (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330289"></a><a name="PREFERREDMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This boolean parameter controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> is a preferred master browser  for its workgroup.
	</p><p>
	If this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, on startup, <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will force
	an election, and it will have a slight advantage in winning the election.  It is recommended that this
	parameter is used in conjunction with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER" target="_top">domain master = yes</a>, so that
	<code class="literal">nmbd</code> can guarantee becoming a domain master.
	</p><p>
	Use this option with caution, because if there are several hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT)
	that are preferred  master browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically  and continuously attempt
	to become the local master browser. This will result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing
	capabilities.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preferred master</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preload modules (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330374"></a>

preload modules (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330375"></a><a name="PRELOADMODULES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of paths to modules that should
	be loaded into smbd before a client connects. This improves
	the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload modules</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload modules</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="auto services"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330433"></a>

<a name="AUTOSERVICES"></a>auto services
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330434"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRELOAD">preload</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preload (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330464"></a>

preload (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330465"></a><a name="PRELOAD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of services that you want to be 
	automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful 
	for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be 
	visible.</p><p>
	Note that if you just want all printers in your 
	printcap file loaded then the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOADPRINTERS" target="_top">load printers</a>
	 option is easier.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload</code></em> = <code class="literal">fred lp colorlp</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preserve case (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330537"></a>

preserve case (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330538"></a><a name="PRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the client passes, or if 
	they are forced to be the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULTCASE" target="_top">default case</a>.
	</p><p>
	See the section on <a class="link" href="#NAMEMANGLINGSECT" title="NAME MANGLING">NAME MANGLING</a> for a fuller discussion.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preserve case</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="print ok"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330601"></a>

<a name="PRINTOK"></a>print ok
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330602"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTABLE">printable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printable (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330632"></a>

printable (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330633"></a><a name="PRINTABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then 
    clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory 
    specified for the service. </p><p>Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing 
    to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling 
    of print data. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a> parameter controls only non-printing access to 
    the resource.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printcap cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330692"></a>

printcap cache time (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330694"></a><a name="PRINTCAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the number of seconds before the printing
    subsystem is again asked for the known printers.
    </p><p>Setting this parameter to 0 disables any rescanning for new 
    or removed printers after the initial startup.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">750</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">600</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printcap"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330756"></a>

<a name="PRINTCAP"></a>printcap
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330757"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTCAPNAME">printcap name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printcap name (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330788"></a>

printcap name (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330789"></a><a name="PRINTCAPNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually
	<code class="filename"> /etc/printcap</code>). See the discussion of the <a class="link" href="#PRINTERSSECT" title="The [printers] section">[printers]</a> section above for reasons why you might want to do this.
	</p><p>
	To use the CUPS printing interface set <code class="literal">printcap name = cups </code>. This should
	be supplemented by an addtional setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing = cups</a> in the [global]
	section.  <code class="literal">printcap name = cups</code> will use the  "dummy" printcap
	created by CUPS, as specified in your CUPS configuration file.
    </p><p>
	On System V systems that use <code class="literal">lpstat</code> to 
    list available printers you can use <code class="literal">printcap name = lpstat
    </code> to automatically obtain lists of available printers. This 
    is the default for systems that define SYSV at configure time in 
    Samba (this includes most System V based systems). If <em class="parameter"><code>
    printcap name</code></em> is set to <code class="literal">lpstat</code> on 
    these systems then Samba will launch <code class="literal">lpstat -v</code> and 
    attempt to parse the output to obtain a printer list.
	</p><p>
	A minimal printcap file would look something like this:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
print1|My Printer 1
print2|My Printer 2
print3|My Printer 3
print4|My Printer 4
print5|My Printer 5
</pre><p>
    where the '|' separates aliases of a printer. The fact that the second alias has a space in
	it gives a hint to Samba that it's a comment.
	</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>
	Under AIX the default printcap name is <code class="filename">/etc/qconfig</code>. Samba will
	assume the file is in AIX <code class="filename">qconfig</code> format if the string <code class="filename">qconfig</code> appears in the printcap filename.
	</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap name</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/printcap</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap name</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/myprintcap</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="print command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id330959"></a>

print command (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id330960"></a><a name="PRINTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>After a print job has finished spooling to 
    a service, this command will be used via a <code class="literal">system()</code> 
    call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will 
    submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there 
    is no requirement that this be the case. The server will not remove 
    the spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the 
    spool file when it has been processed, otherwise you will need to 
    manually remove old spool files.</p><p>The print command is simply a text string. It will be used 
    verbatim after macro substitutions have been made:</p><p>%s, %f - the path to the spool
    file name</p><p>%p - the appropriate printer 
    name</p><p>%J - the job 
    name as transmitted by the client.</p><p>%c - The number of printed pages
    of the spooled job (if known).</p><p>%z - the size of the spooled
    print job (in bytes)</p><p>The print command <span class="emphasis"><em>MUST</em></span> contain at least 
    one occurrence of <em class="parameter"><code>%s</code></em> or <em class="parameter"><code>%f
    </code></em> - the <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is optional. At the time 
    a job is submitted, if no printer name is supplied the <em class="parameter"><code>%p
    </code></em> will be silently removed from the printer command.</p><p>If specified in the [global] section, the print command given 
    will be used for any printable service that does not have its own 
    print command specified.</p><p>If there is neither a specified print command for a 
    printable service nor a global print command, spool files will 
    be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed.</p><p>Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the 
    <code class="constant">nobody</code> account. If this happens then create 
    an alternative guest account that can print and set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a> 
    in the [global] section.</p><p>You can form quite complex print commands by realizing 
    that they are just passed to a shell. For example the following 
    will log a print job, print the file, then remove it. Note that 
    ';' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts.</p><p><code class="literal">print command = echo Printing %s &gt;&gt; 
    /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s</code></p><p>You may have to vary this command considerably depending 
    on how you normally print files on your system. The default for 
    the parameter varies depending on the setting of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a>
	parameter.</p><p>Default: For <code class="literal">printing = BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG 
    or PLP :</code></p><p><code class="literal">print command = lpr -r -P%p %s</code></p><p>For <code class="literal">printing = SYSV or HPUX :</code></p><p><code class="literal">print command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s</code></p><p>For <code class="literal">printing = SOFTQ :</code></p><p><code class="literal">print command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s</code></p><p>For printing = CUPS :   If SAMBA is compiled against
    libcups, then <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTCAP" target="_top">printcap = cups</a> 
    uses the CUPS API to
    submit jobs, etc.  Otherwise it maps to the System V
    commands with the -oraw option for printing, i.e. it
    uses <code class="literal">lp -c -d%p -oraw; rm %s</code>.   
    With <code class="literal">printing = cups</code>,
    and if SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any manually 
	set print command will be ignored.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>print command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printer admin (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331202"></a>

printer admin (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331204"></a><a name="PRINTERADMIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This lists users who can do anything to printers
	via the remote administration interfaces offered
	by MS-RPC (usually using a NT workstation).
	This parameter can be set per-share or globally.
	Note: The root user always has admin rights. Use
	caution with use in the global stanza as this can
	cause side effects.
	</p><p>
	This parameter has been marked deprecated in favor 
	of using the SePrintOperatorPrivilege and individual
	print security descriptors.  It will be removed in a future release.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer admin</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer admin</code></em> = <code class="literal">admin, @staff</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printer"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331266"></a>

<a name="PRINTER"></a>printer
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331267"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTERNAME">printer name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printer name (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331297"></a>

printer name (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331298"></a><a name="PRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs spooled through a printable service
	will be sent.
	</p><p>
	If specified in the [global] section, the printer name given will be used for any printable service that
	does not have its own printer name specified.
	</p><p>
	The default value of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERNAME" target="_top">printer name</a> may be <code class="literal">lp</code> on many
	systems.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer name</code></em> = <code class="literal">none</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer name</code></em> = <code class="literal">laserwriter</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printing (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331381"></a>

printing (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331382"></a><a name="PRINTING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters controls how printer status  information is
    interpreted on your system. It also affects the  default values for
    the <em class="parameter"><code>print command</code></em>,  <em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lppause command </code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lpresume command</code></em>, and  <em class="parameter"><code>lprm command</code></em> if specified in the 
    [global] section.</p><p>Currently nine printing styles are supported. They are
    <code class="constant">BSD</code>, <code class="constant">AIX</code>, 
    <code class="constant">LPRNG</code>, <code class="constant">PLP</code>,
    <code class="constant">SYSV</code>, <code class="constant">HPUX</code>,
    <code class="constant">QNX</code>, <code class="constant">SOFTQ</code>,
    and <code class="constant">CUPS</code>.</p><p>To see what the defaults are for the other print 
    commands when using the various options use the <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a> program.</p><p>This option can be set on a per printer basis.  Please be 
    aware however, that you must place any of the various printing 
    commands (e.g. print command, lpq command, etc...) after defining
    the value for the <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> option since it will 
    reset the printing commands to default values.</p><p>See also the discussion in the <a class="link" href="#PRINTERSSECT" title="The [printers] section">
    [printers]</a> section.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> = <code class="literal">Depends on the operating system, see
<code class="literal">testparm -v.</code></code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printjob username (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331527"></a>

printjob username (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331528"></a><a name="PRINTJOBUSERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies which user information will be 
    passed to the printing system. Usually, the username is sent,
    but in some cases, e.g. the domain prefix is useful, too.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printjob username</code></em> = <code class="literal">%U</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printjob username</code></em> = <code class="literal">%D\%U</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="print notify backchannel (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331586"></a>

print notify backchannel (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331587"></a><a name="PRINTNOTIFYBACKCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Windows print clients can update print queue status by expecting
	the server to open a backchannel SMB connection to them. Due to
	client firewall settings this can cause considerable timeouts
	and will often fail, as there is no guarantee the client is even
	running an SMB server. By setting this parameter to <code class="constant">no</code>
	the Samba print server will not try to connect back to clients
	and treat corresponding requests as if the connection back to
	the client failed. The default setting of <code class="constant">yes</code>
	causes smbd to attempt this connection.
</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>print notify backchannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="private dir (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331638"></a>

private dir (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331639"></a><a name="PRIVATEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters defines the directory
    smbd will use for storing such files as <code class="filename">smbpasswd</code>
    and <code class="filename">secrets.tdb</code>.
</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>private dir</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/private</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="profile acls (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331691"></a>

profile acls (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331692"></a><a name="PROFILEACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This boolean parameter was added to fix the problems that people have been
	having with storing user profiles on Samba shares from Windows 2000 or
	Windows XP clients. New versions of Windows 2000 or Windows XP service
	packs do security ACL checking on the owner and ability to write of the
	profile directory stored on a local workstation when copied from a Samba
	share.
	</p><p>
	When not in domain mode with winbindd then the security info copied
	onto the local workstation has no meaning to the logged in user (SID) on
	that workstation so the profile storing fails. Adding this parameter
	onto a share used for profile storage changes two things about the
	returned Windows ACL. Firstly it changes the owner and group owner
	of all reported files and directories to be BUILTIN\\Administrators,
	BUILTIN\\Users respectively (SIDs S-1-5-32-544, S-1-5-32-545). Secondly
	it adds an ACE entry of "Full Control" to the SID BUILTIN\\Users to
	every returned ACL. This will allow any Windows 2000 or XP workstation
	user to access the profile.
	</p><p>
	Note that if you have multiple users logging
	on to a workstation then in order to prevent them from being able to access
	each others profiles you must remove the "Bypass traverse checking" advanced
	user right. This will prevent access to other users profile directories as
	the top level profile directory (named after the user) is created by the
	workstation profile code and has an ACL restricting entry to the directory
	tree to the owning user.
	</p><p>
	Note that this parameter should be set to yes on dedicated profile shares only.
	On other shares, it might cause incorrect file ownerships.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>profile acls</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="queuepause command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331761"></a>

queuepause command (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331762"></a><a name="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be 
    executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes 
    a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, 
    such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.</p><p>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, 
    but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 
    and NT.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name 
    is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.
    </p><p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute 
    path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the 
	server.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>queuepause command</code></em> = <code class="literal">disable %p</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="queueresume command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331832"></a>

queueresume command (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331833"></a><a name="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be 
    executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue. It 
    is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the 
    previous parameter (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND" target="_top">queuepause command</a>).</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes 
    a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue, 
    such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer.</p><p>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, 
    but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 
    and NT.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name 
    is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the 
    command.</p><p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute 
    path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the 
	server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>queueresume command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>queueresume command</code></em> = <code class="literal">enable %p</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="read list (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id331926"></a>

read list (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id331927"></a><a name="READLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list
	then they will not be given write access, no matter what the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a> option is set
	to. The list can include group names using the syntax described in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INVALIDUSERS" target="_top">invalid users</a>
	parameter.
	</p><p>This parameter will not work with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = share</a> in 
    Samba 3.0.  This is by design.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read list</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read list</code></em> = <code class="literal">mary, @students</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="read only (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332020"></a>

read only (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332021"></a><a name="READONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>An inverted synonym is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITEABLE" target="_top">writeable</a>.</p><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then users 
    of a service may not create or modify files in the service's 
    directory.</p><p>Note that a printable service (<code class="literal">printable = yes</code>)
    will <span class="emphasis"><em>ALWAYS</em></span> allow writing to the directory 
    (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read only</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="read raw (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332092"></a>

read raw (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332094"></a><a name="READRAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server 
    will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data 
    to clients.</p><p>If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in 
    one packet. This typically provides a major performance benefit.
    </p><p>However, some clients either negotiate the allowable 
    block size incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block 
	sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads.</p><p>In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning 
	tool and left severely alone.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read raw</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="realm (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332148"></a>

realm (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332149"></a><a name="REALM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the kerberos realm to use. The realm is 
	used as the ADS equivalent of the NT4 <code class="literal">domain</code>. It
	is usually set to the DNS name of the kerberos server.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>realm</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>realm</code></em> = <code class="literal">mysambabox.mycompany.com</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="registry shares (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332211"></a>

registry shares (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332212"></a><a name="REGISTRYSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This turns on or off support for share definitions read from
	registry. Shares defined in <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span> take
	precedence over shares with the same name defined in
	registry. See the section on registry-based configuration
	for details. 
	</p><p>
		Note that this parameter defaults to <span class="emphasis"><em>no</em></span>,
		but it is set to <span class="emphasis"><em>yes</em></span> when
		 <em class="parameter"><code>config backend</code></em> is set
		to <span class="emphasis"><em>registry</em></span>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>registry shares</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>registry shares</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="remote announce (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332294"></a>

remote announce (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332295"></a><a name="REMOTEANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This option allows you to setup <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to periodically announce itself 
	to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name.
	</p><p>
	This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear in a remote workgroup for 
	which the normal browse propagation rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be 
	anywhere that you can send IP packets to.
	</p><p>
	For example:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<code class="literal">remote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS 192.168.4.255/STAFF</code>
</pre><p>
	the above line would cause <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to announce itself 
	to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names. If you leave out the 
	workgroup name, then the one given in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> parameter 
	is used instead.
	</p><p>
	The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses of the remote 
	networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known browse masters if your network 
	config is that stable.
	</p><p>
	See the chapter on Network Browsing in the Samba-HOWTO book.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>remote announce</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="remote browse sync (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332390"></a>

remote browse sync (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332391"></a><a name="REMOTEBROWSESYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This option allows you to setup <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to periodically request 
	synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba 
	server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to 
	gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks. This 
	is done in a manner that does not work with any non-Samba servers.
	</p><p>
	This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local 
	clients to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse 
	propagation rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere 
	that you can send IP packets to.
	</p><p>
	For example:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<em class="parameter"><code>remote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255</code></em>
</pre><p>
	the above line would cause <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to request the master browser on the 
	specified subnets or addresses to synchronize their browse lists with 
	the local server.
	</p><p>
	The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast 
	addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses 
	of known browse masters if your network config is that stable. If 
	a machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate 
	that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it 
	is in fact the browse master on its segment.
	</p><p>
	The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#REMOTEBROWSESYNC" target="_top">remote browse sync</a> may be used on networks
	where there is no WINS server, and may be used on disjoint networks where
	each network has its own WINS server.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>remote browse sync</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="rename user script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332490"></a>

rename user script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332491"></a><a name="RENAMEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is the full pathname to a script that will be run as root by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> under special circumstances described below.
	</p><p>
	When a user with admin authority or SeAddUserPrivilege rights renames a user (e.g.: from the NT4 User Manager
	for Domains), this script will be run to rename the POSIX user.  Two variables, <code class="literal">%uold</code> and
	<code class="literal">%unew</code>, will be substituted with the old and new usernames, respectively.  The script should
	return 0 upon successful completion, and nonzero otherwise.
	</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>
	The script has all responsibility to rename all the necessary data that is accessible in this posix method.
	This can mean different requirements for different backends.  The tdbsam and smbpasswd backends will take care
	of the contents of their respective files, so the script is responsible only for changing the POSIX username, and
	other data that may required for your circumstances, such as home directory.  Please also consider whether or
	not you need to rename the actual home directories themselves.  The ldapsam backend will not make any changes,
	because of the potential issues with renaming the LDAP naming attribute.  In this case the script is
	responsible for changing the attribute that samba uses (uid) for locating users, as well as any data that
	needs to change for other applications using the same directory.
	</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>rename user script</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="reset on zero vc (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332569"></a>

reset on zero vc (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332570"></a><a name="RESETONZEROVC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This boolean option controls whether an incoming session setup
	should kill other connections coming from the same IP. This matches
        the default Windows 2003 behaviour.

	Setting this parameter to yes becomes necessary when you have a flaky
	network and windows decides to reconnect while the old connection
	still has files with share modes open. These files become inaccessible
	over the new connection.

	The client sends a zero VC on the new connection, and Windows 2003
	kills all other connections coming from the same IP. This way the
	locked files are accessible again.

	Please be aware that enabling this option will kill connections behind
	a masquerading router.

	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>reset on zero vc</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="restrict anonymous (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332616"></a>

restrict anonymous (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332617"></a><a name="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The setting of this parameter determines whether user and
    group list information is returned for an anonymous connection.
    and mirrors the effects of the
</p><pre class="programlisting">
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\
           Control\LSA\RestrictAnonymous
</pre><p>
	registry key in Windows 2000 and Windows NT.  When set to 0, user
	and group list information is returned to anyone who asks.  When set
    to 1, only an authenticated user can retrive user and
    group list information.  For the value 2, supported by
    Windows 2000/XP and Samba, no anonymous connections are allowed at
    all.  This can break third party and Microsoft
    applications which expect to be allowed to perform
	operations anonymously.</p><p>
    The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 1 is dubious,
    as user and group list information can be obtained using other
	means.
	</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>
    The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 2 is removed
    by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok = yes</a> on any share.
	</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>restrict anonymous</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332693"></a>

<a name="ROOT"></a>root
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332694"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root dir"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332725"></a>

<a name="ROOTDIR"></a>root dir
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332726"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332756"></a>

root directory (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332757"></a><a name="ROOTDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The server will <code class="literal">chroot()</code> (i.e. 
    Change its root directory) to this directory on startup. This is 
    not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the 
    server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries. 
    It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other 
    parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use ".." in file names 
    to access other directories (depending on the setting of the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDESMBCONFOPTIONS" target="_top">wide smbconfoptions</a> parameter).
    </p><p>Adding a <em class="parameter"><code>root directory</code></em> entry other 
    than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price. It 
    absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the 
    sub-tree specified in the <em class="parameter"><code>root directory</code></em> 
    option, <span class="emphasis"><em>including</em></span> some files needed for 
    complete operation of the server. To maintain full operability 
    of the server you will need to mirror some system files 
    into the <em class="parameter"><code>root directory</code></em> tree. In particular 
    you will need to mirror <code class="filename">/etc/passwd</code> (or a 
    subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed for 
    printing (if required). The set of files that must be mirrored is
    operating system dependent.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/homes/smb</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root postexec (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332869"></a>

root postexec (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332870"></a><a name="ROOTPOSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>postexec</code></em>
	parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for 
	unmounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root postexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root preexec close (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332916"></a>

root preexec close (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332917"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec close
	</code></em> parameter except that the command is run as root.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root preexec close</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root preexec (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id332963"></a>

root preexec (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id332964"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec</code></em>
	parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for 
	mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a connection is opened.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root preexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="rpc_server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id333010"></a>

rpc_server (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id333011"></a><a name="RPC_SERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Defines what kind of rpc server to use for a named pipe.
	The rpc_server prefix must be followed by the pipe name, and a value.
	</p><p>
	Three possible values are currently supported:
		<code class="literal">embedded</code>
		<code class="literal">daemon</code>
		<code class="literal">external</code>
	</p><p>
	The classic method is to run every pipe as an internal function
	<span class="emphasis"><em>embedded</em></span> in smbd.
	</p><p>
	An alternative method is to fork a <span class="emphasis"><em>daemon</em></span>
	early on at smbd startup time. This is supported only for selected
	pipes.
	</p><p>
	Choosing the <span class="emphasis"><em>external</em></span> option allows to run a
	completely independent (3rd party) server capable of interfacing
	with samba via the MS-RPC interface over named pipes.
	</p><p>
	Currently only the spoolss pipe can be configured in
	<span class="emphasis"><em>daemon</em></span> mode like this:
	</p><pre class="programlisting">
	rpc_server:spoolss = daemon
	</pre><p>
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>rpc_server</code></em> = <code class="literal">none</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="security mask (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id333109"></a>

security mask (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id333110"></a><a name="SECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits will be set when a Windows NT client is manipulating the
	UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box.
	</p><p>
	This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the incoming permission bits, thus resetting
	any bits not in this mask. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCESECURITYMODE" target="_top">force  security mode</a>, which works in a manner similar to this one but uses a logical OR instead of an AND. 
	</p><p>
	Essentially, all bits set to zero in this mask will result in setting to zero the corresponding bits on the
	file permissions regardless of the previous status of this bits on the file.
    </p><p>
	If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing a user to set all the user/group/world permissions on a file.
    </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>
	Note</em></span> that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this 
    restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.  Administrators of
	most normal systems will probably want to leave it set to <code class="constant">0777</code>.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>security mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0777</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>security mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0770</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="security (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id333205"></a>

security (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id333206"></a><a name="SECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option affects how clients respond to 
    Samba and is one of the most important settings in the <code class="filename">
    smb.conf</code> file.</p><p>The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to 
    protocol negotiations with <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide 
    based on this bit whether (and how) to transfer user and password 
    information to the server.</p><p>The default is <code class="literal">security = user</code>, as this is
    the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and 
    Windows NT.</p><p>The alternatives are
    <code class="literal">security = ads</code> or <code class="literal">security = domain
    </code>, which support joining Samba to a Windows domain, along with <code class="literal">security = share</code> and <code class="literal">security = server</code>, both of which are deprecated.</p><p>In versions of Samba prior to 2.0.0, the default was 
    <code class="literal">security = share</code> mainly because that was
    the only option at one stage.</p><p>You should use <code class="literal">security = user</code> and
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST" target="_top">map to guest</a> if you
    want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares). This 
    is commonly used for a shared printer server. </p><p>It is possible to use <code class="literal">smbd</code> in a <span class="emphasis"><em>
    hybrid mode</em></span> where it is offers both user and share 
    level security under different <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NETBIOSALIASES" target="_top">NetBIOS aliases</a>. </p><p>The different settings will now be explained.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSUSER"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = USER</em></span></p><p>This is the default security setting in Samba.
    With user-level security a client must first "log-on" with a
    valid username and password (which can be mapped using the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP" target="_top">username map</a>
    parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypted passwords</a> parameter) can also
    be used in this security mode. Parameters such as <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USER" target="_top">user</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTONLY" target="_top">guest only</a> if set	are then applied and
    may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after
    the user has been successfully authenticated.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Note</em></span> that the name of the resource being
    requested is <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> sent to the server until after
    the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why
    guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing
    the server to automatically map unknown users into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>.
    See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST" target="_top">map to guest</a> parameter for details on doing this.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION">NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = DOMAIN</em></span></p><p>This mode will only work correctly if <a class="citerefentry" href="net.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">net</span>(8)</span></a> has been used to add this
    machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypted passwords</a>
	parameter to be set to <code class="constant">yes</code>. In this
    mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing
    it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly
    the same way that a Windows NT Server would do.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Note</em></span> that a valid UNIX user must still
    exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow
    Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Note</em></span> that from the client's point
    of view <code class="literal">security = domain</code> is the same
    as <code class="literal">security = user</code>. It only
    affects how the server deals with the authentication,
    it does not in any way affect what the client sees.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Note</em></span> that the name of the resource being
    requested is <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> sent to the server until after
    the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why
    guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing
    the server to automatically map unknown users into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>.
    See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST" target="_top">map to guest</a> parameter for details on doing this.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION">
    NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" target="_top">password server</a> parameter and
	 the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypted passwords</a> parameter.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSSHARE"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = SHARE</em></span></p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This option is deprecated as it is incompatible with SMB2</p></div><p>When clients connect to a share level security server, they 
    need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before 
    attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients 
    such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with 
    a username but no password when talking to a <code class="literal">security = share
    </code> server). Instead, the clients send authentication information 
    (passwords) on a per-share basis, at the time they attempt to connect 
    to that share.</p><p>Note that <code class="literal">smbd</code> <span class="emphasis"><em>ALWAYS</em></span> 
    uses a valid UNIX user to act on behalf of the client, even in
    <code class="literal">security = share</code> level security.</p><p>As clients are not required to send a username to the server
    in share level security, <code class="literal">smbd</code> uses several
    techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf
    of the client.</p><p>A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given
    client password is constructed using the following methods :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTONLY" target="_top">guest only</a> parameter is set, then all the other 
	    stages are missed and only the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a> username is checked.
	    </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Is a username is sent with the share connection 
	    request, then this username (after mapping - see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP" target="_top">username map</a>), 
	    is added as a potential username.
	    </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>If the client did a previous <span class="emphasis"><em>logon
	    </em></span> request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the 
	    username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username.
	    </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The name of the service the client requested is 
	    added as a potential username.
	    </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The NetBIOS name of the client is added to 
	    the list as a potential username.
	    </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Any users on the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USER" target="_top">user</a> list are added as potential usernames.
	    </p></li></ul></div><p>If the <em class="parameter"><code>guest only</code></em> parameter is 
    not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password. 
    The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the 
    UNIX user.</p><p>If the <em class="parameter"><code>guest only</code></em> parameter is 
    set, or no username can be determined then if the share is marked 
    as available to the <em class="parameter"><code>guest account</code></em>, then this 
    guest user will be used, otherwise access is denied.</p><p>Note that it can be <span class="emphasis"><em>very</em></span> confusing 
    in share-level security as to which UNIX username will eventually
    be used in granting access.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION">
    NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSSERVER"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = SERVER</em></span></p><p>
	In this depicted mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to another SMB server, such as an
	NT box. If this fails it will revert to <code class="literal">security = user</code>. It expects the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypted passwords</a> parameter to be set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, unless the remote
	server does not support them.  However note that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot
	revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid <code class="filename">smbpasswd</code> file to check users against. See the chapter about the User Database in
	the Samba HOWTO Collection for details on how to set this up.
</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This mode of operation has
    significant pitfalls since it is more vulnerable to
    man-in-the-middle attacks and server impersonation.  In particular,
    this mode of operation can cause significant resource consumption on
    the PDC, as it must maintain an active connection for the duration
    of the user's session.  Furthermore, if this connection is lost,
    there is no way to reestablish it, and further authentications to the
    Samba server may fail (from a single client, till it disconnects).
	</p></div><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>If the client selects NTLMv2 authentication, then this mode of operation <span class="emphasis"><em>will fail</em></span>
	</p></div><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>From the client's point of 
    view, <code class="literal">security = server</code> is the
    same as <code class="literal">security = user</code>.  It
    only affects how the server deals  with the authentication, it does
	not in any way affect what the  client sees.</p></div><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This option is deprecated, and may be removed in future</p></div><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Note</em></span> that the name of the resource being 
    requested is <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> sent to the server until after 
    the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why 
    guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing 
    the server to automatically map unknown users into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>. 
    See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST" target="_top">map to guest</a> parameter for details on doing this.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION">
    NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" target="_top">password server</a> parameter and the 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypted passwords</a> parameter.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSADS"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = ADS</em></span></p><p>In this mode, Samba will act as a domain member in an ADS realm. To operate 
		in this mode, the machine running Samba will need to have Kerberos installed 
		and configured and Samba will need to be joined to the ADS realm using the 
		net utility. </p><p>Note that this mode does NOT make Samba operate as a Active Directory Domain 
		Controller. </p><p>Read the chapter about Domain Membership in the HOWTO for details.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>security</code></em> = <code class="literal">USER</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>security</code></em> = <code class="literal">DOMAIN</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="send spnego principal (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id333989"></a>

send spnego principal (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id333990"></a><a name="SENDSPNEGOPRINCIPAL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not
    <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will send the
    server-supplied principal sometimes given in the SPNEGO
    exchange.</p><p>If enabled, Samba can attempt to help clients to use
    Kerberos to contact it, even when known only by IP address or a
    name not registered with our KDC as a service principal name.
    Kerberos relies on names, so ordinarily cannot function in this
    situation. </p><p>If disabled, Samba will send the string
    not_defined_in_RFC4178@please_ignore as the 'rfc4178 hint',
    following the updated RFC and Windows 2008 behaviour in this area.
    </p><p>Note that Windows XP SP2 and later versions already ignored
    this value in all circumstances. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>send spnego principal</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="server schannel (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334054"></a>

server schannel (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334055"></a><a name="SERVERSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel.
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL" target="_top">server schannel = no</a> does not offer the schannel, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL" target="_top">server schannel = auto</a> offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL" target="_top">server schannel = yes</a> denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel.
	This is only the case for Windows NT4 before SP4.
	</p><p>
	Please note that with this set to <code class="literal">no</code>, you will have to apply the WindowsXP
	<code class="filename">WinXP_SignOrSeal.reg</code> registry patch found in the docs/registry subdirectory of the Samba distribution tarball.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server schannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server schannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="server signing (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334161"></a>

server signing (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334162"></a><a name="SERVERSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB signing. Possible values 
    are <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>mandatory</em></span> 
    and <span class="emphasis"><em>disabled</em></span>. 
    </p><p>When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced. 
    When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set 
	to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server signing</code></em> = <code class="literal">Disabled</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="server string (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334218"></a>

server string (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334220"></a><a name="SERVERSTRING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print 
        manager and next to the IPC connection in <code class="literal">net view</code>. It 
        can be any string that you wish to show to your users.</p><p>It also sets what will appear in browse lists next 
	to the machine name.</p><p>A <em class="parameter"><code>%v</code></em> will be replaced with the Samba 
	version number.</p><p>A <em class="parameter"><code>%h</code></em> will be replaced with the 
		hostname.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server string</code></em> = <code class="literal">Samba %v</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server string</code></em> = <code class="literal">University of GNUs Samba Server</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="set directory (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334305"></a>

set directory (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334306"></a><a name="SETDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	If <code class="literal">set directory = no</code>, then 	users of the 
	service may not use the setdir command to change directory.
	</p><p>
	The <code class="literal">setdir</code> command is only implemented 
	in the Digital Pathworks client. See the Pathworks documentation 
	for details.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="set primary group script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334363"></a>

set primary group script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334364"></a><a name="SETPRIMARYGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a
	primary group in addition to the auxiliary groups.  This script
	sets the primary group in the unix userdatase when an
	administrator sets the primary group from the windows user
	manager or when fetching a SAM with <code class="literal">net rpc
	vampire</code>. <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em> will be replaced
	with the user whose primary group is to be set. 
	<em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> will be replaced with the group to
	set.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set primary group script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set primary group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/usermod -g '%g' '%u'</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="set quota command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334440"></a>

set quota command (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334441"></a><a name="SETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">set quota command</code> should only be used 
	whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that 
	samba can use.</p><p>This option is only available if Samba was configured with the argument <code class="literal">--with-sys-quotas</code> or 
	on linux when <code class="literal">./configure --with-quotas</code> was used and a working quota api 
	was found in the system. Most packages are configured with these options already.</p><p>This parameter should specify the path to a script that 
	can set quota for the specified arguments.</p><p>The specified script should take the following arguments:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>1 - quota type
			</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="circle"><li class="listitem"><p>1 - user quotas</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>2 - user default quotas (uid = -1)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>3 - group quotas</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>4 - group default quotas (gid = -1)</p></li></ul></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>2 - id (uid for user, gid for group, -1 if N/A)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>3 - quota state (0 = disable, 1 = enable, 2 = enable and enforce)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>4 - block softlimit</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>5 - block hardlimit</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>6 - inode softlimit</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>7 - inode hardlimit</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>8(optional) - block size, defaults to 1024</p></li></ul></div><p>The script should output at least one line of data on success. And nothing on failure.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/sbin/set_quota</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="share:fake_fscaps (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334594"></a>

share:fake_fscaps (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334595"></a><a name="SHARE:FAKE_FSCAPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is needed to support some special application that makes
	QFSINFO calls to check whether we set the SPARSE_FILES bit
	(0x40). If this bit is not set that particular application
	refuses to work against
	Samba. With <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHARE:FAKE_FSCAPS" target="_top">share:fake_fscaps = 64</a>
	the SPARSE_FILES file system capability flag is set. Use other
	decimal values to specify the bitmask you need to fake.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>share:fake_fscaps</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="share modes (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334650"></a>

share modes (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334651"></a><a name="SHAREMODES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This enables or disables the honoring of
	the <em class="parameter"><code>share modes</code></em> during a file open. These
	modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access
	to a file.</p><p>This is a deprecated option from old versions of
	Samba, and will be removed in the next major release.
	</p><p>These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so
	they are simulated using shared memory.</p><p>The share modes that are enabled by this option are
	the standard Windows share modes.
	</p><p>This option gives full share compatibility and is enabled
	by default.</p><p>You should <span class="emphasis"><em>NEVER</em></span> turn this parameter
	off as many Windows applications will break if you do so.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>share modes</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="short preserve case (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334720"></a>

short preserve case (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334721"></a><a name="SHORTPRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of
	suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULTCASE" target="_top">default case</a>.
	This  option can be use with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRESERVECASE" target="_top">preserve case = yes</a> to permit long filenames
	to retain their case, while short names are lowered.
	</p><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="#NAMEMANGLINGSECT" title="NAME MANGLING">NAME MANGLING</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>short preserve case</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="show add printer wizard (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334794"></a>

show add printer wizard (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334795"></a><a name="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support
    for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will 
    appear on Samba hosts in the share listing.  Normally this folder will 
    contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW).  However, it is 
    possible to disable this feature regardless of the level of privilege 
    of the connected user.</p><p>Under normal circumstances, the Windows NT/2000 client will 
    open a handle on the printer server with OpenPrinterEx() asking for
    Administrator privileges.  If the user does not have administrative
    access on the print server (i.e is not root or a member of the 
    <em class="parameter"><code>printer admin</code></em> group), the OpenPrinterEx() 
    call fails and the client makes another open call with a request for 
    a lower privilege level.  This should succeed, however the APW 
    icon will not be displayed.</p><p>Disabling the <em class="parameter"><code>show add printer wizard</code></em>
    parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server
	to fail.  Thus the APW icon will never be displayed. 
</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This does not prevent the same user from having 
		administrative privilege on an individual printer.</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>show add printer wizard</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="shutdown script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id334866"></a>

shutdown script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id334868"></a><a name="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by 
	 <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> that should 
	start a shutdown procedure.</p><p>If the connected user posseses the <code class="constant">SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege</code>,
	right, this command will be run as root.</p><p>The %z %t %r %f variables are expanded as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%z</code></em> will be substituted with the
			shutdown message sent to the server.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%t</code></em> will be substituted with the
			number of seconds to wait before effectively starting the
			shutdown procedure.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%r</code></em> will be substituted with the
			switch <span class="emphasis"><em>-r</em></span>. It means reboot after shutdown
			for NT.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%f</code></em> will be substituted with the
			switch <span class="emphasis"><em>-f</em></span>. It means force the shutdown
			even if applications do not respond for NT.</p></li></ul></div><p>Shutdown script example:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
#!/bin/bash

time=$2
let time="${time} / 60"
let time="${time} + 1"

/sbin/shutdown $3 $4 +$time $1 &amp;

</pre><p>
        Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="smb2 max credits (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335013"></a>

smb2 max credits (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335014"></a><a name="SMB2MAXCREDITS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous SMB2 operations
that Samba tells the client it will allow. This is similar to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXMUX" target="_top">max mux</a>
parameter for SMB1. You should never need to set this parameter.
</p><p>The default is 8192 credits, which is the same as a Windows 2008R2 SMB2 server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb2 max credits</code></em> = <code class="literal">8192</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="smb2 max read (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335070"></a>

smb2 max read (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335071"></a><a name="SMB2MAXREAD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the protocol value that <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will return to a client, informing the client of the largest
size that may be returned by a single SMB2 read call.
</p><p>The maximum is 65536 bytes (64KB), which is the same as a Windows Vista SMB2 server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb2 max read</code></em> = <code class="literal">65536</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="smb2 max trans (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335124"></a>

smb2 max trans (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335125"></a><a name="SMB2MAXTRANS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the protocol value that <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will return to a client, informing the client of the largest
size of buffer that may be used in querying file meta-data via QUERY_INFO and related SMB2 calls.
</p><p>The maximum is 65536 bytes (64KB), which is the same as a Windows Vista SMB2 server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb2 max trans</code></em> = <code class="literal">65536</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="smb2 max write (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335179"></a>

smb2 max write (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335180"></a><a name="SMB2MAXWRITE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the protocol value that <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will return to a client, informing the client of the largest
size that may be sent to the server by a single SMB2 write call.
</p><p>The maximum is 65536 bytes (64KB), which is the same as a Windows Vista SMB2 server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb2 max write</code></em> = <code class="literal">65536</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="smb encrypt (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335233"></a>

smb encrypt (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335234"></a><a name="SMBENCRYPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a new feature introduced with Samba 3.2 and above. It is an
    extension to the SMB/CIFS protocol negotiated as part of the UNIX extensions.
    SMB encryption uses the GSSAPI (SSPI on Windows) ability to encrypt
    and sign every request/response in a SMB protocol stream. When
    enabled it provides a secure method of SMB/CIFS communication,
    similar to an ssh protected session, but using SMB/CIFS authentication
    to negotiate encryption and signing keys. Currently this is only
    supported by Samba 3.2 smbclient, and hopefully soon Linux CIFSFS
    and MacOS/X clients. Windows clients do not support this feature.
    </p><p>This controls whether the remote client is allowed or required to use SMB encryption. Possible values 
    are <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>mandatory</em></span> 
    and <span class="emphasis"><em>disabled</em></span>. This may be set on a per-share
    basis, but clients may chose to encrypt the entire session, not
    just traffic to a specific share. If this is set to mandatory
    then all traffic to a share <span class="emphasis"><em>must</em></span> must
    be encrypted once the connection has been made to the share.
    The server would return "access denied" to all non-encrypted
    requests on such a share. Selecting encrypted traffic reduces
    throughput as smaller packet sizes must be used (no huge UNIX
    style read/writes allowed) as well as the overhead of encrypting
    and signing all the data.
    </p><p>If SMB encryption is selected, Windows style SMB signing (see
    the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSIGNING" target="_top">server signing</a> option) is no longer necessary,
    as the GSSAPI flags use select both signing and sealing of the data.
    </p><p>When set to auto, SMB encryption is offered, but not enforced. 
    When set to mandatory, SMB encryption is required and if set 
    to disabled, SMB encryption can not be negotiated.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb encrypt</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="smb passwd file (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335324"></a>

smb passwd file (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335325"></a><a name="SMBPASSWDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By
    default the path to the smbpasswd file  is compiled into Samba.</p><p>
    An example of use is:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd
</pre><p>
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb passwd file</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/private/smbpasswd</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="smb ports (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335376"></a>

smb ports (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335377"></a><a name="SMBPORTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb ports</code></em> = <code class="literal">445 139</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="socket address (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335416"></a>

socket address (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335417"></a><a name="SOCKETADDRESS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to control what
	address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to
	support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each
	with a different configuration.</p><p>Setting this option should never be necessary on usual Samba
	servers running only one nmbd.</p><p>By default Samba will accept connections on any
		address.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket address</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket address</code></em> = <code class="literal">192.168.2.20</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="socket options (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335482"></a>

socket options (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335483"></a><a name="SOCKETOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to set socket options 
    to be used when talking with the client.</p><p>Socket options are controls on the networking layer 
    of the operating systems which allow the connection to be 
    tuned.</p><p>This option will typically be used to tune your Samba  server
    for optimal performance for your local network. There is  no way
    that Samba can know what the optimal parameters are for  your net,
    so you must experiment and choose them yourself. We  strongly
    suggest you read the appropriate documentation for your  operating
    system first (perhaps <code class="literal">man
    setsockopt</code> will help).</p><p>You may find that on some systems Samba will say 
    "Unknown socket option" when you supply an option. This means you 
    either incorrectly  typed it or you need to add an include file 
    to includes.h for your OS.  If the latter is the case please 
    send the patch to <a class="ulink" href="mailto:samba-technical@samba.org" target="_top">
    samba-technical@samba.org</a>.</p><p>Any of the supported socket options may be combined 
    in any way you like, as long as your OS allows it.</p><p>This is the list of socket options currently settable 
    using this option:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>SO_KEEPALIVE</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_REUSEADDR</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_BROADCAST</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>TCP_NODELAY</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>IPTOS_LOWDELAY</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>IPTOS_THROUGHPUT</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_SNDBUF *</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_RCVBUF *</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_SNDLOWAT *</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_RCVLOWAT *</p></li></ul></div><p>Those marked with a <span class="emphasis"><em>'*'</em></span> take an integer 
    argument. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable 
    or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you 
    don't specify 1 or 0.</p><p>To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION = VALUE 
    for example <code class="literal">SO_SNDBUF = 8192</code>. Note that you must 
    not have any spaces before or after the = sign.</p><p>If you are on a local network then a sensible option 
    might be:</p><p><code class="literal">socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</code></p><p>If you have a local network then you could try:</p><p><code class="literal">socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY</code></p><p>If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try 
    setting IPTOS_THROUGHPUT. </p><p>Note that several of the options may cause your Samba 
		server to fail completely. Use these options with caution!</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket options</code></em> = <code class="literal">TCP_NODELAY</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket options</code></em> = <code class="literal">IPTOS_LOWDELAY</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="stat cache (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335675"></a>

stat cache (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335676"></a><a name="STATCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will use a cache in order to 
	speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need 
	to change this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>stat cache</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="state directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335725"></a>

state directory (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335726"></a><a name="STATEDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Usually, most of the TDB files are stored in the
	<em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em>. Since
	Samba 3.4.0, it is possible to differentiate between TDB files
	with persistent data and TDB files with non-persistent data using
	the <em class="parameter"><code>state directory</code></em> and the
	<em class="parameter"><code>cache directory</code></em> options.
	</p><p> This option specifies the directory where TDB files containing
	persistent data will be stored.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>state directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/var/locks</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>state directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/samba/locks/state</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="store dos attributes (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335807"></a>

store dos attributes (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335808"></a><a name="STOREDOSATTRIBUTES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	If this parameter is set Samba attempts to first read DOS attributes (SYSTEM, HIDDEN, ARCHIVE or
	READ-ONLY) from a filesystem extended attribute, before mapping DOS attributes to UNIX permission bits (such
	as occurs with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN" target="_top">map hidden</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPREADONLY" target="_top">map readonly</a>).  When set, DOS
	attributes will be stored onto an extended attribute in the UNIX filesystem, associated with the file or
	directory.  For no other mapping to occur as a fall-back, the parameters <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN" target="_top">map hidden</a>,
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPSYSTEM" target="_top">map system</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPARCHIVE" target="_top">map archive</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPREADONLY" target="_top">map  readonly</a> must be set to off.  This parameter writes the DOS attributes as a string into the extended
	attribute named "user.DOSATTRIB". This extended attribute is explicitly hidden from smbd clients requesting an
	EA list. On Linux the filesystem must have been mounted with the mount option user_xattr in order for
	extended attributes to work, also extended attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel.

	In Samba 3.5.0 and above the "user.DOSATTRIB" extended attribute has been extended to store
	the create time for a file as well as the DOS attributes. This is done in a backwards compatible
	way so files created by Samba 3.5.0 and above can still have the DOS attribute read from this
	extended attribute by earlier versions of Samba, but they will not be able to read the create
	time stored there. Storing the create time separately from the normal filesystem meta-data
	allows Samba to faithfully reproduce NTFS semantics on top of a POSIX filesystem.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>store dos attributes</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="strict allocate (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335923"></a>

strict allocate (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335924"></a><a name="STRICTALLOCATE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls the handling of
    disk space allocation in the server. When this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>
    the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real
    disk storage blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour
    of actually forcing the disk system to allocate real storage blocks
    when a file is created or extended to be a given size. In UNIX
    terminology this means that Samba will stop creating sparse files.</p><p>This option is really desgined for file systems that support
    fast allocation of large numbers of blocks such as extent-based file systems.
    On file systems that don't support extents (most notably ext3) this can
    make Samba slower. When you work with large files over &gt;100MB on file
    systems without extents you may even run into problems with clients
    running into timeouts.</p><p>When you have an extent based filesystem it's likely that we can make
    use of unwritten extents which allows Samba to allocate even large amounts
    of space very fast and you will not see any timeout problems caused by
    strict allocate. With strict allocate in use you will also get much better
    out of quota messages in case you use quotas. Another advantage of
    activating this setting is that it will help to reduce file
    fragmentation.</p><p>To give you an idea on which filesystems this setting might currently
    be a good option for you: XFS, ext4, btrfs, ocfs2 on Linux and JFS2 on
    AIX support unwritten extents. On Filesystems that do not support it,
    preallocation is probably an expensive operation where you will see reduced
    performance and risk to let clients run into timeouts when creating large
    files. Examples are ext3, ZFS, HFS+ and most others, so be aware if you
    activate this setting on those filesystems.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict allocate</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="strict locking (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id335994"></a>

strict locking (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id335995"></a><a name="STRICTLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is an enumerated type that controls the handling of file locking in the server. When this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>,
	the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist. This can be slow on 
	some systems.
	</p><p>
	When strict locking is set to Auto (the default), the server performs file lock checks only on non-oplocked files.
	As most Windows redirectors perform file locking checks locally on oplocked files this is a good trade off for
	improved performance.
	</p><p>
	When strict locking is disabled, the server performs file lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them.
	</p><p>
	Well-behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it is important.  So in the vast majority of cases, 
	 <code class="literal">strict locking = Auto</code> or
	 <code class="literal">strict locking = no</code> is acceptable.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict locking</code></em> = <code class="literal">Auto</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="strict sync (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336066"></a>

strict sync (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336067"></a><a name="STRICTSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer
    shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing
    a sync to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces the process to be
    suspended until the kernel has ensured that all outstanding data in
    kernel disk buffers has been safely stored onto stable storage.
    This is very slow and should only be done rarely. Setting this
    parameter to <code class="constant">no</code> (the default) means that
    <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> ignores the Windows
    applications requests for a sync call. There is only a possibility
    of losing data if the operating system itself that Samba is running
    on crashes, so there is little danger in this default setting. In
    addition, this fixes many performance problems that people have
    reported with the new Windows98 explorer shell file copies.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="svcctl list (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336124"></a>

svcctl list (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336125"></a><a name="SVCCTLLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of init scripts that smbd
    will use for starting and stopping Unix services via the Win32 
    ServiceControl API.  This allows Windows administrators to 
    utilize the MS Management Console plug-ins to manage a 
    Unix server running Samba.</p><p>The administrator must create a directory
    name <code class="filename">svcctl</code> in Samba's $(libdir)
    and create symbolic links to the init scripts in 
    <code class="filename">/etc/init.d/</code>.  The name of the links
    must match the names given as part of the <em class="parameter"><code>svcctl list</code></em>.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>svcctl list</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>svcctl list</code></em> = <code class="literal">cups postfix portmap httpd</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="sync always (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336204"></a>

sync always (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336205"></a><a name="SYNCALWAYS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls 
    whether writes will always be written to stable storage before 
    the write call returns. If this is <code class="constant">no</code> then the server will be 
    guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can 
    set a bit indicating that a particular write should be synchronous). 
    If this is <code class="constant">yes</code> then every write will be followed by a <code class="literal">fsync()
    </code> call to ensure the data is written to disk. Note that 
    the <em class="parameter"><code>strict sync</code></em> parameter must be set to
    <code class="constant">yes</code> in order for this parameter to have 
    any effect.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>sync always</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="syslog only (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336271"></a>

syslog only (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336272"></a><a name="SYSLOGONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the system 
    syslog only, and not to the debug log files. There still will be some
	logging to log.[sn]mbd even if <span class="emphasis"><em>syslog only</em></span> is enabled.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>syslog only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="syslog (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336316"></a>

syslog (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336317"></a><a name="SYSLOG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. 
    Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog <code class="constant">LOG_ERR</code>, debug level one maps onto 
    <code class="constant">LOG_WARNING</code>, debug level two maps onto <code class="constant">LOG_NOTICE</code>,
    debug level three maps onto LOG_INFO. All higher levels are mapped to <code class="constant">LOG_DEBUG</code>.
    </p><p>
    This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages to syslog.  Only messages with debug 
    level less than this value will be sent to syslog. There still will be some
    logging to log.[sn]mbd even if <span class="emphasis"><em>syslog only</em></span> is enabled.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>syslog</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="template homedir (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336383"></a>

template homedir (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336384"></a><a name="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT 
	user, the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon  uses this
	parameter to fill in the home directory for that user. If the
	string <em class="parameter"><code>%D</code></em> is present it
	is substituted  with the user's Windows NT domain name. If the
	string <em class="parameter"><code>%U</code></em> is present it
	is substituted with the user's Windows  NT user name.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>template homedir</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home/%D/%U</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="template shell (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336445"></a>

template shell (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336446"></a><a name="TEMPLATESHELL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT 
	user, the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon uses this
	parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="time offset (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336482"></a>

time offset (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336483"></a><a name="TIMEOFFSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This deprecated parameter is a setting in minutes to add
	to the normal GMT to local time conversion. This is useful if 
	you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight 
	saving time handling.</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This option is deprecated, and will be removed in the next major release</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time offset</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time offset</code></em> = <code class="literal">60</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="time server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336547"></a>

time server (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336548"></a><a name="TIMESERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> advertises itself as a time server to Windows 
clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time server</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="unix charset (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336596"></a>

unix charset (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336597"></a><a name="UNIXCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the charset the unix machine 
		Samba runs on uses. Samba needs to know this in order to be able to 
		convert text to the charsets other SMB clients use.
	</p><p>This is also the charset Samba will use when specifying arguments 
		to scripts that it invokes.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix charset</code></em> = <code class="literal">UTF8</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix charset</code></em> = <code class="literal">ASCII</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="unix extensions (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336659"></a>

unix extensions (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336660"></a><a name="UNIXEXTENSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba
    implements the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP.
    These extensions enable Samba to better serve UNIX CIFS clients
    by supporting features such as symbolic links, hard links, etc...
    These extensions require a similarly enabled client, and are of
    no current use to Windows clients.</p><p>
    Note if this parameter is turned on, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDELINKS" target="_top">wide links</a>
    parameter will automatically be disabled.
    </p><p>
    See the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ALLOWINSECUREWIDELINKS" target="_top">allow insecure wide links</a>
    if you wish to change this coupling between the two parameters.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix extensions</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="unix password sync (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336732"></a>

unix password sync (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336733"></a><a name="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba 
    attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password 
    when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed. 
    If this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> the program specified in the <em class="parameter"><code>passwd
    program</code></em> parameter is called <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> -
    to allow the new UNIX password to be set without access to the 
    old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no 
	access to the old password cleartext, only the new).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix password sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="use client driver (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336789"></a>

use client driver (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336790"></a><a name="USECLIENTDRIVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000
    clients.  It has no effect on Windows 95/98/ME clients.  When 
    serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing
    a valid printer driver on the Samba host, the client will be required
    to install a local printer driver.  From this point on, the client
    will treat the print as a local printer and not a network printer 
    connection.  This is much the same behavior that will occur
    when <code class="literal">disable spoolss = yes</code>.
    </p><p>The differentiating  factor is that under normal
    circumstances, the NT/2000 client will  attempt to open the network
    printer using MS-RPC.  The problem is that because the client
    considers the printer to be local, it will attempt to issue the
    OpenPrinterEx() call requesting access rights associated  with the
    logged on user. If the user possesses local administator rights but
    not root privilege on the Samba host (often the case), the
    OpenPrinterEx() call will fail.  The result is that the client will
    now display an "Access Denied; Unable to connect" message
    in the printer queue window (even though jobs may successfully be
    printed).  </p><p>If this parameter is enabled for a printer, then any attempt
    to open the printer with the PRINTER_ACCESS_ADMINISTER right is mapped
    to PRINTER_ACCESS_USE instead.  Thus allowing the OpenPrinterEx()
    call to succeed.  <span class="emphasis"><em>This parameter MUST not be enabled
    on a print share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba 
	server.</em></span></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use client driver</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="use mmap (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336857"></a>

use mmap (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336858"></a><a name="USEMMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can
    depend on mmap working correctly on the running system. Samba requires a coherent
    mmap/read-write system memory cache. Currently only HPUX does not have such a
    coherent cache, and so this parameter is set to <code class="constant">no</code> by
    default on HPUX. On all other systems this parameter should be left alone. This
    parameter is provided to help the Samba developers track down problems with
    the tdb internal code.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use mmap</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="username level (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336905"></a>

username level (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336906"></a><a name="USERNAMELEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at 
    the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase 
    username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the 
    username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the 
    username is not found on the UNIX machine.</p><p>If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes. 
    This parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase
    combinations to try while trying to determine the UNIX user name. The
    higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower
    the discovery of usernames will be. Use this parameter when you have
    strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as <code class="constant">AstrangeUser
    </code>.</p><p>This parameter is needed only on UNIX systems that have case
    sensitive usernames.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username level</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username level</code></em> = <code class="literal">5</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="username map cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id336979"></a>

username map cache time (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id336980"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Mapping usernames with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP" target="_top">username map</a>
	or <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAPSCRIPT" target="_top">username map script</a>
	features of Samba can be relatively expensive.
	During login of a user, the mapping is done several times.
	In particular, calling the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAPSCRIPT" target="_top">username map script</a>
	can slow down logins if external databases have to be queried from
	the script being called.
	</p><p>
	The parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAPCACHETIME" target="_top">username map cache time</a>
	controls a mapping cache. It specifies the number of seconds a
	mapping from the username map file or script is to be efficiently cached.
	The default of 0 means no caching is done.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">60</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="username map script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337089"></a>

username map script (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337090"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This script is a mutually exclusive alternative to the 
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP" target="_top">username map</a> parameter.  This parameter 
	specifies and external program or script that must accept a single 
	command line option (the username transmitted in the authentication
	request) and return a line line on standard output (the name to which 
	the account should mapped).  In this way, it is possible to store
	username map tables in an LDAP or NIS directory services.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/samba/scripts/mapusers.sh</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="username map (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337160"></a>

username map (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337161"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This option allows you to specify a file containing a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server.
	This can be used for several purposes. The most common is to map usernames that users use on DOS or Windows
	machines to those that the UNIX box uses. The other is to map multiple users to a single username so that they
	can more easily share files.
	</p><p>
	Please note that for user or share mode security, the username map is applied prior to validating the user
	credentials.  Domain member servers (domain or ads) apply the username map after the user has been
	successfully authenticated by the domain controller and require fully qualified enties in the map table (e.g.
	biddle = <code class="literal">DOMAIN\foo</code>).
	</p><p>
	The map file is parsed line by line. Each line should contain a single UNIX username on the left then a '='
	followed by a list of usernames on the right. The list of usernames on the right may contain names of the form
	@group in which case they will match any UNIX username in that group. The special client name '*' is a
	wildcard and matches any name. Each line of the map file may be up to 1023 characters long.
	</p><p>
	The file is processed on each line by taking the supplied username and comparing it with each username on the
	right hand side of the '=' signs. If the supplied name matches any of the names on the right hand side then it
	is replaced with the name on the left. Processing then continues with the next line.
	</p><p>
	If any line begins with a '#' or a ';' then it is ignored.
	</p><p>
	If any line begins with an '!' then the processing will stop after that line if a mapping was done by the
	line.  Otherwise mapping continues with every line being processed.  Using '!' is most useful when you have a
	wildcard mapping line later in the file.
	</p><p>
	For example to map from the name <code class="constant">admin</code> or <code class="constant">administrator</code> to the UNIX
	name <code class="constant"> root</code> you would use:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<code class="literal">root = admin administrator</code>
</pre><p>
	Or to map anyone in the UNIX group <code class="constant">system</code> to the UNIX name <code class="constant">sys</code> you would use:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<code class="literal">sys = @system</code>
</pre><p>
	</p><p>
	You can have as many mappings as you like in a username map file.
	</p><p>
	If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then the netgroup database is checked before the <code class="filename">/etc/group </code> database for matching groups.
	</p><p>
	You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them by using double quotes around the name. For example:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<code class="literal">tridge = "Andrew Tridgell"</code>
</pre><p>
    would map the windows username "Andrew Tridgell" to the unix username "tridge".
	</p><p>
	The following example would map mary and fred to the unix user sys, and map the rest to guest. Note the use of the
    '!' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on that line:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
!sys = mary fred
guest = *
</pre><p>
    </p><p>
	Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences of usernames.  Thus if you connect to \\server\fred and
	<code class="constant">fred</code> is remapped to <code class="constant">mary</code> then you will actually be connecting to
	\\server\mary and will need to supply a password suitable for <code class="constant">mary</code> not
	<code class="constant">fred</code>. The only exception to this is the username passed to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" target="_top">password server</a> (if you have one). The password server will receive whatever username the client
	supplies without  modification.
    </p><p>
	Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect this has is with printing. Users who have been
	mapped may have trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think they don't own the print
	job.
	</p><p>
	Samba versions prior to 3.0.8 would only support reading the fully qualified username 
	(e.g.: <code class="literal">DOMAIN\user</code>) from
	the username map when performing a kerberos login from a client.  However, when looking up a map entry for a
	user authenticated by NTLM[SSP], only the login name would be used for matches.  This resulted in inconsistent
	behavior sometimes even on the same server.
   </p><p>
   The following functionality is obeyed in version 3.0.8 and later:
   </p><p>
    When performing local authentication, the username map is applied to the login name before attempting to authenticate
    the connection.
    </p><p>
    When relying upon a external domain controller for validating authentication requests, smbd will apply the username map
    to the fully qualified username (i.e. <code class="literal">DOMAIN\user</code>) only after the user has been successfully authenticated.
    </p><p>
    An example of use is:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map
</pre><p>
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# no username map</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="user"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337402"></a>

<a name="USER"></a>user
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337403"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="users"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337433"></a>

<a name="USERS"></a>users
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337434"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="username (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337465"></a>

username (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337466"></a><a name="USERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited 
    list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against 
    each username in turn (left to right).</p><p>The deprecated <em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> line is needed only when
    the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case 
    for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg 
    usernames to UNIX usernames. In both these cases you may also be 
    better using the \\server\share%user syntax instead.</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> line is not a great 
    solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate 
    the supplied password against each of the usernames in the 
    <em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> line in turn. This is slow and 
    a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords. 
    You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter 
    unwisely.</p><p>Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security. This 
    parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints 
    to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the 
    supplied password. Users can login as whoever they please and 
    they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a 
    telnet session. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, 
    so they cannot do anything that user cannot do.</p><p>To restrict a service to a particular set of users you 
    can use the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VALIDUSERS" target="_top">valid users</a> parameter.</p><p>If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name 
    will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba 
    is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in 
    the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users 
    in the group of that name.</p><p>If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name 
    will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will 
    expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.</p><p>If any of the usernames begin with a '&amp;' then the name 
    will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba 
    is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list 
    of all users in the netgroup group of that name.</p><p>Note that searching though a groups database can take 
    quite some time, and some clients may time out during the 
    search.</p><p>See the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION">NOTE ABOUT
	USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a> for more information on how 
	this parameter determines access to the services.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# The guest account if a guest service, 
		else &lt;empty string&gt;.</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> = <code class="literal">fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare allow guests (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337611"></a>

usershare allow guests (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337612"></a><a name="USERSHAREALLOWGUESTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether user defined shares are allowed
	to be accessed by non-authenticated users or not. It is the equivalent
	of allowing people who can create a share the option of setting
	<em class="parameter"><code>guest ok = yes</code></em> in a share
	definition. Due to its security sensitive nature, the default
	is set to off.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare allow guests</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare max shares (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337660"></a>

usershare max shares (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337661"></a><a name="USERSHAREMAXSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of user defined shares
	that are allowed to be created by users belonging to the group owning the
	usershare directory. If set to zero (the default) user defined shares are ignored.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare max shares</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare owner only (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337702"></a>

usershare owner only (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337703"></a><a name="USERSHAREOWNERONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether the pathname exported by
	a user defined shares must be owned by the user creating the
	user defined share or not. If set to True (the default) then
	smbd checks that the directory path being shared is owned by
	the user who owns the usershare file defining this share and
	refuses to create the share if not. If set to False then no
	such check is performed and any directory path may be exported
	regardless of who owns it.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare owner only</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare path (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337746"></a>

usershare path (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337747"></a><a name="USERSHAREPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the absolute path of the directory on the
	filesystem used to store the user defined share definition files.
	This directory must be owned by root, and have no access for
	other, and be writable only by the group owner. In addition the
	"sticky" bit must also be set, restricting rename and delete to
	owners of a file (in the same way the /tmp directory is usually configured).
	Members of the group owner of this directory are the users allowed to create
	usershares. If this parameter is undefined then no user defined
	shares are allowed.
	</p><p>
	For example, a valid usershare directory might be /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares,
	set up as follows.
	</p><p>
	</p><pre class="programlisting">
	ls -ld /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares/
	drwxrwx--T  2 root power_users 4096 2006-05-05 12:27 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares/
	</pre><p>
	</p><p>
	In this case, only members of the group "power_users" can create user defined shares.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare path</code></em> = <code class="literal">NULL</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare prefix allow list (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337810"></a>

usershare prefix allow list (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337811"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXALLOWLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames
	the root of which are allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions.
	If the pathname to be exported doesn't start with one of the strings in this
	list, the user defined share will not be allowed. This allows the Samba
	administrator to restrict the directories on the system that can be
	exported by user defined shares.
	</p><p>
	If there is a "usershare prefix deny list" and also a
	"usershare prefix allow list" the deny list is processed
	first, followed by the allow list, thus leading to the most
	restrictive interpretation.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare prefix allow list</code></em> = <code class="literal">NULL</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare prefix allow list</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home /data /space</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare prefix deny list (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337877"></a>

usershare prefix deny list (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337878"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXDENYLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames
	the root of which are NOT allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions.
	If the pathname exported starts with one of the strings in this
	list the user defined share will not be allowed. Any pathname not
	starting with one of these strings will be allowed to be exported
	as a usershare. This allows the Samba administrator to restrict the
	directories on the system that can be exported by user defined shares.
	</p><p>
	If there is a "usershare prefix deny list" and also a
	"usershare prefix allow list" the deny list is processed
	first, followed by the allow list, thus leading to the most
	restrictive interpretation.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare prefix deny list</code></em> = <code class="literal">NULL</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare prefix deny list</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc /dev /private</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare template share (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id337944"></a>

usershare template share (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id337945"></a><a name="USERSHARETEMPLATESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>User defined shares only have limited possible parameters
	such as path, guest ok, etc. This parameter allows usershares to
	"cloned" from an existing share. If "usershare template share"
	is set to the name of an existing share, then all usershares
	created have their defaults set from the parameters set on this
	share.
	</p><p>
	The target share may be set to be invalid for real file
	sharing by setting the parameter "-valid = False" on the template
	share definition. This causes it not to be seen as a real exported
	share but to be able to be used as a template for usershares.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare template share</code></em> = <code class="literal">NULL</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare template share</code></em> = <code class="literal">template_share</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="use sendfile (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338011"></a>

use sendfile (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338012"></a><a name="USESENDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and the <code class="constant">sendfile()</code> 
    system call is supported by the underlying operating system, then some SMB read calls 
    (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that
    are exclusively oplocked. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU's
    and cause Samba to be faster. Samba automatically turns this off for clients
    that use protocol levels lower than NT LM 0.12 and when it detects a client is
    Windows 9x (using sendfile from Linux will cause these clients to fail).
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use sendfile</code></em> = <code class="literal">false</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="use spnego (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338063"></a>

use spnego (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338064"></a><a name="USESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This deprecated variable controls controls whether samba will try
    to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with 
    WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism. 
</p><p>
    Unless further issues are discovered with our SPNEGO
    implementation, there is no reason this should ever be
	disabled.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use spnego</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="utmp directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338110"></a>

utmp directory (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338111"></a><a name="UTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only available if Samba has 
	been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal">
	--with-utmp</code>. It specifies a directory pathname that is
	used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that
	record user connections to a Samba server. By default this is 
	not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the 
	native system is set to use (usually 
	<code class="filename">/var/run/utmp</code> on Linux).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>utmp directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# Determined automatically</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>utmp directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/utmp</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="utmp (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338183"></a>

utmp (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338184"></a><a name="UTMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled  
	with the option <code class="literal">--with-utmp</code>. If set to 
	 <code class="constant">yes</code> then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records 
	(depending on the UNIX system) whenever a connection is made to a Samba server. 
	Sites may use this to record the user connecting to a Samba share.
	</p><p>
	Due to the requirements of the utmp record, we 	are required to create a unique 
	identifier for the incoming user.  Enabling this option creates an n^2 	algorithm 
	to find this number.  This may impede performance on large installations. 
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>utmp</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="valid users (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338241"></a>

valid users (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338242"></a><a name="VALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this service. Names starting with 
    '@', '+' and  '&amp;' are interpreted using the same rules as described in the 
    <em class="parameter"><code>invalid users</code></em> parameter.
    </p><p>
    If this is empty (the default) then any user can login. If a username is in both this list 
    and the <em class="parameter"><code>invalid users</code></em> list then access is denied 
    for that user.
    </p><p>
    The current servicename is substituted for <em class="parameter"><code>%S</code></em>. 
    This is useful in the [homes] section.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>valid users</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# No valid users list (anyone can login) </code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>valid users</code></em> = <code class="literal">greg, @pcusers</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="-valid (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338327"></a>

-valid (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338328"></a><a name="-VALID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter indicates whether a share is 
	valid and thus can be used. When this parameter is set to false, 
	the share will be in no way visible nor accessible.
	</p><p>
	This option should not be 
	used by regular users but might be of help to developers. 
	Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>-valid</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="veto files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338374"></a>

veto files (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338375"></a><a name="VETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible.  Each entry in 
	the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*' and '?' 
	can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards.
	</p><p>
	Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and must <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> include the  
	unix directory 	separator '/'.
	</p><p>
	Note that the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CASESENSITIVE" target="_top">case sensitive</a> option is applicable in vetoing files.
	</p><p>
	One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important to be aware of is Samba's behaviour when
	trying to delete a directory. If a directory that is to be deleted contains nothing but veto files this
	deletion will <span class="emphasis"><em>fail</em></span> unless you also set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEVETOFILES" target="_top">delete veto files</a> 
	parameter to <em class="parameter"><code>yes</code></em>.
	</p><p>
	Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files 
	and directories for a match as they are scanned.
	</p><p>
	Examples of use include:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
; Veto any files containing the word Security,
; any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the
; word root.
veto files = /*Security*/*.tmp/*root*/

; Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server
; creates.
veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/
</pre><p>
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>veto files</code></em> = <code class="literal">No files or directories are vetoed.</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="veto oplock files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338481"></a>

veto oplock files (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338482"></a><a name="VETOOPLOCKFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter is only valid when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a>
	parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator
	to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that
	match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOFILES" target="_top">veto files</a> parameter.
	</p><p>
	You might want to do this on files that you know will be heavily contended 
	for by clients. A good example of this is in the NetBench SMB benchmark 
	program, which causes heavy client contention for files ending in 
	<code class="filename">.SEM</code>. To cause Samba not to grant 
	oplocks on these files you would use the line (either in the [global] 
	section or in the section for the particular NetBench share.
	</p><p>
	An example of use is:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
veto oplock files = /.*SEM/
</pre><p>
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>veto oplock files</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# No files are vetoed for oplock grants</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="vfs object"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338567"></a>

<a name="VFSOBJECT"></a>vfs object
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338568"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#VFSOBJECTS">vfs objects</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="vfs objects (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338598"></a>

vfs objects (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338599"></a><a name="VFSOBJECTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the backend names which 
	are used for Samba VFS I/O operations.  By default, normal 
	disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded 
	with one or more VFS objects. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>vfs objects</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>vfs objects</code></em> = <code class="literal">extd_audit recycle</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="volume (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338656"></a>

volume (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338658"></a><a name="VOLUME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the volume label 
	returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs 
	that insist on a particular volume label.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>volume</code></em> = <code class="literal">
# the name of the share</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wide links (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338698"></a>

wide links (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338699"></a><a name="WIDELINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not links 
	in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links 
	that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the 
	server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only 
	to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported.</p><p>Note: Turning this parameter on when UNIX extensions are enabled
	will allow UNIX clients to create symbolic links on the share that
	can point to files or directories outside restricted path exported
	by the share definition. This can cause access to areas outside of
	the share. Due to this problem, this parameter will be automatically
	disabled (with a message in the log file) if the
	<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXEXTENSIONS" target="_top">unix extensions</a> option is on.
	</p><p>
	See the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ALLOWINSECUREWIDELINKS" target="_top">allow insecure wide links</a>
	if you wish to change this coupling between the two parameters.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wide links</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338773"></a>

winbind cache time (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338774"></a><a name="WINBINDCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of 
	seconds the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon will cache 
	user and group information before querying a Windows NT server 
	again.</p><p>
	This does not apply to authentication requests, these are always 
	evaluated in real time unless the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDOFFLINELOGON" target="_top">winbind   offline logon</a> option has been enabled.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">300</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind enum groups (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338839"></a>

winbind enum groups (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338840"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be necessary to suppress 
	the enumeration of groups through the <code class="literal">setgrent()</code>,
	<code class="literal">getgrent()</code> and
	<code class="literal">endgrent()</code> group of system calls.  If
	the <em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum groups</code></em> parameter is
	<code class="constant">no</code>, calls to the <code class="literal">getgrent()</code> system
	call will not return any data. </p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly.  </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind enum users (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id338927"></a>

winbind enum users (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id338928"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be
	necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the <code class="literal">setpwent()</code>,
	 <code class="literal">getpwent()</code> and
	 <code class="literal">endpwent()</code> group of system calls.  If
	the <em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum users</code></em> parameter is
	 <code class="constant">no</code>, calls to the <code class="literal">getpwent</code> system call
	will not return any data. </p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>Turning off user
	enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly.  For
	example, the finger program relies on having access to the
	full user list when searching for matching
	usernames. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum users</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind expand groups (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339016"></a>

winbind expand groups (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339017"></a><a name="WINBINDEXPANDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum depth that winbindd
              will traverse when flattening nested group memberships
	      of Windows domain groups.  This is different from the
	      <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS" target="_top">winbind nested groups</a> option
              which implements the Windows NT4 model of local group 
	      nesting.  The "winbind expand groups"
              parameter specifically applies to the membership of 
	      domain groups.</p><p>Be aware that a high value for this parameter can
	 result in system slowdown as the main parent winbindd daemon
	 must perform the group unrolling and will be unable to answer
	 incoming NSS or authentication requests during this time.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind expand groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind max clients (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339078"></a>

winbind max clients (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339079"></a><a name="WINBINDMAXCLIENTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the maximum number of clients
	the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon can connect with.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind max clients</code></em> = <code class="literal">200</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind max domain connections (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339128"></a>

winbind max domain connections (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339129"></a><a name="WINBINDMAXDOMAINCONNECTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the maximum number of simultaneous
	connections that the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon should open to the
	domain controller of one domain.
	Setting this parameter to a value greater than 1 can improve
	scalability with many simultaneous winbind requests,
	some of which might be slow.
	</p><p>
	Note that if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDOFFLINELOGON" target="_top">winbind offline logon</a> is set to
	<code class="constant">Yes</code>, then only one
	DC connection is allowed per domain, regardless of this setting.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind max domain connections</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind max domain connections</code></em> = <code class="literal">10</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind nested groups (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339213"></a>

winbind nested groups (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339214"></a><a name="WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to yes, this parameter activates the support for nested
                 groups. Nested groups are also called local groups or
                 aliases. They work like their counterparts in Windows: Nested
                 groups are defined locally on any machine (they are shared
                 between DC's through their SAM) and can contain users and
                 global groups from any trusted SAM. To be able to use nested
                 groups, you need to run nss_winbind.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind nested groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind normalize names (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339258"></a>

winbind normalize names (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339259"></a><a name="WINBINDNORMALIZENAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether winbindd will replace
	  whitespace in user and group names with an underscore (_) character.
	  For example, whether the name "Space Kadet" should be
	  replaced with the string "space_kadet".
	  Frequently Unix shell scripts will have difficulty with usernames
	  contains whitespace due to the default field separator in the shell.
	  If your domain possesses names containing the underscore character,
	  this option may cause problems unless the name aliasing feature
	  is supported by your nss_info plugin.
        </p><p>This feature also enables the name aliasing API which can
	  be used to make domain user and group names to a non-qualified
	  version.  Please refer to the manpage for the configured
	  idmap and nss_info plugin for the specifics on how to configure
	  name aliasing for a specific configuration.  Name aliasing takes
	  precedence (and is mutually exclusive) over the whitespace
	  replacement mechanism discussed previsouly.
	  </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind normalize names</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind normalize names</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind nss info (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339327"></a>

winbind nss info (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339328"></a><a name="WINBINDNSSINFO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control how Winbind retrieves Name
	Service Information to construct a user's home directory and login shell.
	Currently the following settings are available:

	</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>template</code></em>
			- The default, using the parameters of <em class="parameter"><code>template
			shell</code></em> and <em class="parameter"><code>template homedir</code></em>)
			</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>&lt;sfu | rfc2307 &gt;</code></em>
			- When Samba is running in security = ads and your Active Directory
			Domain Controller does support the Microsoft "Services for Unix" (SFU)
			LDAP schema, winbind can retrieve the login shell and the home
			directory attributes directly from your Directory Server. Note that
			retrieving UID and GID from your ADS-Server requires to
			use <em class="parameter"><code>idmap config DOMAIN:backend</code></em> = ad
			as well.
			</p></li></ul></div><p>

</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind nss info</code></em> = <code class="literal">template</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind nss info</code></em> = <code class="literal">sfu</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind offline logon (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339434"></a>

winbind offline logon (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339435"></a><a name="WINBINDOFFLINELOGON"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should
	allow to login with the <em class="parameter"><code>pam_winbind</code></em> 
	module using Cached Credentials. If enabled, winbindd will store user credentials
	from successful logins encrypted in a local cache.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind offline logon</code></em> = <code class="literal">false</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind offline logon</code></em> = <code class="literal">true</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind reconnect delay (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339500"></a>

winbind reconnect delay (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339501"></a><a name="WINBINDRECONNECTDELAY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of
	seconds the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon will wait between
	attempts to contact a Domain controller for a domain that is
	determined to be down or not contactable.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind reconnect delay</code></em> = <code class="literal">30</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind refresh tickets (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339550"></a>

winbind refresh tickets (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339551"></a><a name="WINBINDREFRESHTICKETS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should refresh Kerberos Tickets
	retrieved using the <em class="parameter"><code>pam_winbind</code></em> module.

</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind refresh tickets</code></em> = <code class="literal">false</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind refresh tickets</code></em> = <code class="literal">true</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind rpc only (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339615"></a>

winbind rpc only (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339616"></a><a name="WINBINDRPCONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	Setting this parameter to <code class="literal">yes</code> forces 
	winbindd to use RPC instead of LDAP to retrieve information from Domain
        Controllers.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind rpc only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind separator (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339662"></a>

winbind separator (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339664"></a><a name="WINBINDSEPARATOR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an admin to define the character 
	used when listing a username of the form of <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN
	</code></em>\<em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em>.  This parameter 
	is only applicable when using the <code class="filename">pam_winbind.so</code>
	and <code class="filename">nss_winbind.so</code> modules for UNIX services.
	</p><p>Please note that setting this parameter to + causes problems
	with group membership at least on glibc systems, as the character +
	is used as a special character for NIS in /etc/group.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind separator</code></em> = <code class="literal">'\'</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind separator</code></em> = <code class="literal">+</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind trusted domains only (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339745"></a>

winbind trusted domains only (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339746"></a><a name="WINBINDTRUSTEDDOMAINSONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter is designed to allow Samba servers that are members 
	of a Samba controlled domain to use UNIX accounts distributed via NIS, 
	rsync, or LDAP as the uid's for winbindd users in the hosts primary domain.
	Therefore, the user <code class="literal">DOMAIN\user1</code> would be mapped to 
	the account user1 in /etc/passwd instead of allocating a new uid for him or her.
	</p><p>
	This parameter is now deprecated in favor of the newer idmap_nss backend.
	Refer to the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_nss.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_nss</span>(8)</span></a> man page for more information.
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind trusted domains only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind use default domain (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339807"></a>

winbind use default domain (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339808"></a><a name="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether the
	 <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon should operate on users  
	without domain component in their username. Users without a domain
	component are treated as is part of the winbindd server's own
	domain. While this does not benefit Windows users, it makes SSH, FTP and
	e-mail function in a way much closer to the way they
	would in a native unix system.</p><p>This option should be avoided if possible. It can cause confusion
	about responsibilities for a user or group. In many situations it is
	not clear whether winbind or /etc/passwd should be seen as authoritative
	for a user, likewise for groups.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind use default domain</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind use default domain</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wins hook (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339881"></a>

wins hook (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339882"></a><a name="WINSHOOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba is running as a WINS server this 
	allows you to call an external program for all changes to the 
	WINS database. The primary use for this option is to allow the 
	dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as 
	dynamic DNS.</p><p>The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script 
	or executable that will be called as follows:</p><p><code class="literal">wins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list</code></p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>The first argument is the operation and is
			one  of "add", "delete", or
			"refresh". In most cases the operation
			can  be ignored as the rest of the parameters
			provide sufficient  information. Note that
			"refresh" may sometimes be called when
			the  name has not previously been added, in that
			case it should be treated  as an add.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The second argument is the NetBIOS name. If the 
			name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called. 
			Legal names contain only  letters, digits, hyphens, underscores 
			and periods.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The third argument is the NetBIOS name 
			type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) 
			for the name in seconds.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP 
			addresses currently registered for that name. If this list is 
			empty then the name should be deleted.</p></li></ul></div><p>An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update 
	program <code class="literal">nsupdate</code> is provided in the examples 
	directory of the Samba source code. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wins proxy (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id339976"></a>

wins proxy (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id339977"></a><a name="WINSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will respond to broadcast name 
	queries on behalf of  other hosts. You may need to set this 
	to <code class="constant">yes</code> for some older clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wins server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id340029"></a>

wins server (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id340030"></a><a name="WINSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP 
	address for preference) of the WINS server that <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> should register with. If you have a WINS server on 
	your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</p><p>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a
	multi-subnetted network.</p><p>If you want to work in multiple namespaces, you can 
	give every wins server a 'tag'. For each tag, only one 
	(working) server will be queried for a name. The tag should be 
	separated from the ip address by a colon.
	</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>You need to set up Samba to point 
	to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet 
	browsing to work correctly.</p></div><p>See the chapter in the Samba3-HOWTO on Network Browsing.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins server</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins server</code></em> = <code class="literal">mary:192.9.200.1 fred:192.168.3.199 mary:192.168.2.61
	
# For this example when querying a certain name, 192.19.200.1 will 
	be asked first and if that doesn't respond 192.168.2.61. If either 
	of those doesn't know the name 192.168.3.199 will be queried.</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins server</code></em> = <code class="literal">192.9.200.1 192.168.2.61</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wins support (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id340132"></a>

wins support (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id340133"></a><a name="WINSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls if the <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should 
	not set this to <code class="constant">yes</code> unless you have a multi-subnetted network and 
	you wish a particular <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to be your WINS server. 
	Note that you should <span class="emphasis"><em>NEVER</em></span> set this to <code class="constant">yes</code>
	on more than one machine in your network.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="workgroup (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id340198"></a>

workgroup (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id340199"></a><a name="WORKGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what workgroup your server will 
	appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter 
	also controls the Domain name used with 
	the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = domain</a>
		setting.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>workgroup</code></em> = <code class="literal">WORKGROUP</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>workgroup</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYGROUP</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="writable"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id340269"></a>

<a name="WRITABLE"></a>writable
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id340270"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#WRITEABLE">writeable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="writeable (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id340300"></a>

writeable (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id340301"></a><a name="WRITEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Inverted synonym for <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>writeable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="write cache size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id340351"></a>

write cache size (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id340352"></a><a name="WRITECACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value,
    Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file 
    (it does <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> do this for 
    non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request 
    to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible. 
    The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset 
    would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client. 
    Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is stored 
    within it.</p><p>This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more 
    efficient write size for RAID disks (i.e. writes may be tuned to 
    be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems 
    where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free 
    memory for userspace programs.</p><p>The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache 
		(per oplocked file) in bytes.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">262144
#  for a 256k cache size per file</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="write list (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id340425"></a>

write list (S)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id340426"></a><a name="WRITELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
    This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a service. If the 
    connecting user is in this list then they will be given write access, no matter 
    what the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a> option is set to. The list can 
    include group names using the @group syntax.
    </p><p>
    Note that if a user is in both the read list and the write list then they will be 
    given write access.
    </p><p>
    By design, this parameter will not work with the 
    <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = share</a> in Samba 3.0.
    </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write list</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write list</code></em> = <code class="literal">admin, root, @staff</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="write raw (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id340514"></a>

write raw (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id340515"></a><a name="WRITERAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server 
    will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients. 
    You should never need to change this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write raw</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wtmp directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id340556"></a>

wtmp directory (G)
</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id340557"></a><a name="WTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>
	This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal">
	--with-utmp</code>. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the wtmp or wtmpx files (depending on 
	the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server. The difference with the utmp directory is the fact 
	that user info is kept after a user has logged out.
	</p><p>
	By default this is not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the 	native system is set to use (usually 
	<code class="filename">/var/run/wtmp</code> on Linux).
	</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wtmp directory</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code>
</em></span>
</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wtmp directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/log/wtmp</code>
</em></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="WARNINGS"><a name="id340634"></a><h2>WARNINGS</h2><p>
	Although the configuration file permits service names to contain spaces, your client software may not.
	Spaces will be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a problem - but be aware of the possibility.
	</p><p>
	On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - limit service names to eight characters.
	<a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> has no such
	limitation, but attempts to connect from such clients will fail if they truncate the service names.  For this
	reason you should probably keep your service names down to eight characters in length.
	</p><p>
	Use of the <code class="literal">[homes]</code> and <code class="literal">[printers]</code> special sections make life 
	for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default attributes can be tricky. Take extreme
	care when designing these sections. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool directories are
	correct.
	</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id340677"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id340688"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>
	<a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmblookup.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmblookup</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testprns.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testprns</span>(1)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id340767"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>
	The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed
	by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
	</p><p>
	The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another 
	excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <a class="ulink" href="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/" target="_top">
	ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</a>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison.  The conversion
	to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by
	Alexander Bokovoy.
	</p></div></div></body></html>
